JP5937663B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a communication unit that can play a game with points and communicates with a gaming device that adds points using a game value owned by the player, and a variable display device that can change a display state. A game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed to end one game, and the display result that is derived and displayed is determined in advance. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which a winning can be generated when a specific display result is obtained, and points are added in accordance with the winning.

  Conventionally, even after a membership card as an example of a recording medium is inserted into an information display terminal device and then the membership card is extracted, there is a technique in which game data of the member is continuously aggregated (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-328390

  In the one described in Patent Document 1, even if another player starts playing after the membership card is pulled out, there is a possibility that game data by other people may be handled as data of the previous member player. is there. That is, since the player's identity is not determined, it is not determined that the player has changed, and there is a possibility that the game data of the same player will be aggregated even though the player has changed. is there.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to prevent inconvenience that data of a player different from a player who is actually playing a game is tabulated.

(1) In the present invention, a game with a score is possible, and a communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a game device that adds a score using a game value owned by the player, and a display A variable display device capable of changing the state, the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, thereby completing one game. A slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which a winning can be generated when the derived display result becomes a predetermined display result, and points are added in accordance with the winning,
Specific means (microcomputer for slot machine control, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means (score counter) for storing the score;
A score update means (payout control unit 117) for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 40; number of balls to be added) for performing control to transmit the update information that can specify the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device. Send a motion response that includes the number of subtraction balls and the number of game balls)
Player identification information storage means (FIG. 99; for display) that stores the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means of the gaming apparatus when communication with the gaming apparatus is started . The current player game history data storage unit of the production control unit 292),
Player identification information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus at the start of communication with the gaming apparatus. (FIG. 23, FIG. 33, FIG. 58 to FIG. 75; a recovery response including C-ID is transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming device is connected to the slot machine and communication is started, a player who plays a game after the connection between the slot machine and the gaming device is played before the connection. Since the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means is transmitted from the communication unit to the gaming device as information for determining the identity with the player who has been connected, the game is performed after connection. The identity of the player and the player who played the game before the connection can be determined, and the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players can be prevented.

(2) In the slot machine of (1) above, the information transmission control means periodically sends the update information and the points stored in the point storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device (see FIG. 20; every 200 ms)
When the communication unit determines that there is inconsistency as a result of determining the consistency between the update result of the score based on the update information by the gaming device and the score stored in the score storage means Receiving correction information transmitted from the gaming device (receiving a correction instruction command),
A score correction means for correcting the score stored in the score storage means based on the received correction information (the payout control unit 117 corrects the score according to the correction instruction command); It may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming machine side and the slot machine side are caused by an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to fraud and other causes. Even when the stored score does not match, the score stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

It is a front view showing a card unit and a slot machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game log | history data in each of CU side and S stand side. It is a figure which shows the content of the information for the control circuit of the main control part and CU communication control part, and memorize | stored. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process at the time of detecting abnormality as a result of mutual authentication. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a main control part and a CU communication control part. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a main control part and a CU communication control part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an operation instruction. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the detail of each bit of the operation request | requirement of an operation instruction command, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the detail of each bit of the CU state of an operation instruction command. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of an operation response. It is a figure which shows the meaning of various numbers, and a fixed point. (A) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of game machine state 1, (b) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of game machine state 2, (c) is each bit of game machine error state 1 FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of a communication status response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an apparatus information response. It is a figure which shows the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between a card unit and a slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a communication disconnection is detected by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection on the slot machine side. It is a figure which shows an example of the process by the card unit and slot machine at the time of power activation. (A) (b) is a figure which shows an example of the processing of the subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 23, (a) is an authentication sequence at the time of CU power supply starting, (b) is at the time of game machine power supply starting. This is an authentication sequence. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of the subroutine program of the CU communication control part authentication sequence shown by Fig.24 (a). FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing of a subroutine program of a chip ID authentication sequence illustrated in FIG. 24. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the CU communication control part serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the apparatus authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the memory | storage setting to the EEPROM of an authentication key. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of normality, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of abnormality. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a card unit and a slot machine are reconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in the time of standby when the operation of a card unit and a slot machine is not performed. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when a card | curd is inserted in the card unit. It is a flowchart figure which shows the subroutine program of the process at the time of insertion shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and slot machine when consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine at the time of replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine in the case of subtracting the number of points by the instruction | indication on the card unit side. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when a big bonus winning is generated. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the number of points in a slot machine runs out during a game. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when returning a card. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when a game is interrupted. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when unlocking and releasing a front door in a slot machine. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine is not connected when the power is activated while the card unit is holding the card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the operation | movement instruction (no request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach a slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the operation response from a slot machine (response with respect to no request | requirement operation | movement) does not reach | attain a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the operation instruction (addition request) from a card unit does not reach the slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the operation response from a slot machine (response to an addition request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from a card unit does not reach the slot machine. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when an operation response from a slot machine (response to a subtraction request) does not reach the card unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a response to reject addition in response to a card unit addition request. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a subtraction rejection response to the card unit subtraction request. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a clear rejection response to the card unit clear instruction request. It is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a permission rejection response to the card unit game permission request. FIG. 10 shows an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a prohibition rejection response to the card unit game prohibition request. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a front door opening rejection response to the card unit front door opening request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when the power failure in the card unit after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of recovery processing between a card unit and a slot machine in the case where a power interruption has occurred in the card unit before reaching an operation instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in a card unit before the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data is reached. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process when communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power interruption illustrated in FIG. 58. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a control process when communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power failure shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off illustrated in FIG. 60 occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the addition request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the addition request. FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off illustrated in FIG. 64 occurs. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off illustrated in FIG. 65 occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the subtraction request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure has occurred in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the subtraction request. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 68 occurs. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 69 occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of recovery processing between a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the clear request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the clear request. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power interruption occurs shown in FIG. 72. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 73 occurs. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed in conjunction with the processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the card is inserted into the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine in case the share point sharing process which carries out divided transfer (share point share) is performed during the game in which the member card was inserted. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of a card unit and a slot machine in case the score sharing process which carries out the division | segmentation transfer of a score (point sharing) is performed during the game in which the visitor card was inserted. It is a figure which shows the other example of the process of a card unit and a slot machine in case the score sharing process which divides and transfers (score sharing) is performed during the game in which the member card was inserted. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a transition screen figure in FIG. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a figure which shows the whole system for delivering the information for authentication which consists of the authentication key for security ensuring, and unique ID (it is also mentioned SID). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and S stand side in a modification. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program in a modification of the insertion time process shown in FIG. 26.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a concept of terms used in the present embodiment, “gaming equipment” includes gaming machines (pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.), card units, Z counters, card issuing devices, clearing devices, hall management devices, prize exchanges. It is a concept that includes all devices installed in a game hall such as a device, and the “game device” is a concept that excludes only gaming machines from the “game device”.

  First, referring to FIG. 1, a slot machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “S”) 2 is attached to each gaming island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls. Card units (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3 as an example of a gaming device are installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the slot machine 2S at a side position on a predetermined side of the machine 2S.

  The card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall. By accepting a membership card, which is a game recording medium, and converting the game value of the player specified by the record information of the card into a score, the corresponding slot machine 2S exchanges the score for the score It has a function to set a game so that it can be played.

  Each of the visitor card and the membership card has a function of recording the card balance and the points earned by the game so as to be specified by the record information of the card. The difference in the handling of points between membership cards and visitor cards is that the card that can use the medal saving function to save the points earned by the membership card cumulatively even after the game day, while the visitor card Is a card that cannot use the function. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

Hereinafter, both the membership card and the visitor card are also simply referred to as “cards”.
On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a projecting portion 305 projecting forward from the front of the apparatus, a card insertion slot 309 for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 309 is received by the card reader / writer 327 (see FIG. 3), and the information recorded on the card is read. In the protrusion 305 described above, on the surface facing the player, the display 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card and the number of medals specified by the member ID when the member card is received are displayed. An IR light receiving unit 315 (FIG. 1) that receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319 for executing the replay game used and a remote control (not shown) possessed by an attendant of the game hall, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs it. Is omitted).

  Furthermore, a lending button 321, a return button 322, and a call button 798 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation for withdrawing the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and securing the points used for the game. The return button 322 is a button operated when returning the card inserted in the card insertion / discharge port 309. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling a staff member of the game hall.

  The display 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of points and various other information described later. In addition, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if a score acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a predetermined number of points will be deducted from that score and used for the game. When the inserted card is a membership card and the number of points is not recorded, and a stored medal is recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, a predetermined number of points are calculated from the stored medal. Will be withdrawn and given points for use in games.

  The “sold medal” is a point deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game hall. On the other hand, the “score” is the number of points owned by the player as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine, and has not yet been deposited in the game hall. The points may be managed by a management device for managing the number of points set in the game hall. In short, the difference between "save medal" and "scoring" is the point that the medal operation for depositing into the amusement hall has been performed and it has been deposited in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point of whether it is a point of the stage not entered.

  In this embodiment, the stored medal data is not recorded directly on the member card, but stored in the upper server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number so that the corresponding stored medal can be searched based on the member card number. It is configured. On the other hand, the score is recorded directly on the card.

  As a method of recording the card balance or the score so that the membership card or visitor card can be specified, (a) record the card balance or score on the card itself, (b) record the card balance or score on the card itself. Without storing, the card balance or score corresponding to the ID is stored in a computer such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the ID recorded in the card unit. (C) The card balance or score is recorded on the card itself. In addition, a method of storing a card balance or a point corresponding to the ID in a computer such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the ID of the card is conceivable, and any method is adopted in this embodiment. May be.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by the currency discriminator 344, and its authenticity and banknote type are identified. The player is given points according to the bill amount.

  In the following description, giving the player the points to be used for the game by withdrawing the prepaid balance recorded on the card is referred to as “lending of points”.

  The points given by operating the replay button 319 or the lending button 321 and the points given by inserting the bill into the bill insertion slot 302 are collectively stored in the card unit 3. The score is displayed on the display 312. Note that a dedicated indicator for displaying the points may be provided in the card unit 3. The card unit 3 subtracts and updates the points stored for the number of bets set in the slot machine 2S, and adds and updates the points stored for the winning equivalent generated in the slot machine 2S.

  The slot machine 2S sets the number of bets by using the score, and the score is added and updated according to the winning. For this reason, when playing a game in the slot machine 2S, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the slot machine 2S is not provided with a medal slot and a medal payout slot.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 2S, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 10 provided on the front door 2b. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  A display area 51a that is controlled to be displayed by the display 51 is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2b. The display 51 is a liquid crystal display device. In the display area 51a, points, bets set in the game, and other various images (see FIG. 76 or FIGS. 80 to 97) are displayed.

  In order to detect an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player on the display surface on the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the display 51 and to identify the position (for example, the position where the touch operation has been performed). A touch panel (not shown) is installed.

  In addition, the front door 2b has a single BET switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets by using “points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the gaming state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “score = 3” for RT (Replay Time) where the probability of winning the replay and the normal game state before the occurrence of BB is high, and “score = 2” for bonus) MAXBET switch 6 operated at the same time, start switch 7 operated at the start of the game, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated at the time of stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, chance button 58, A jog dial 59 is also provided.

  The jog dial 59 selects and designates various display items (icons) and the like in the display area 51a when the player rotates. When the player rotates the jog dial 59, the display items to be selected among the various display items displayed on the display area 51a are sequentially moved and displayed. The player operates the jog dial 59 to rotate. When the player presses the chance button 58 after designating the display item to be selected, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed.

  In addition, the front door 2b is provided with a game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code and the like, and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of points awarded by the occurrence of winning.

  Further, the front door 2b has a start valid LED 18 for notifying by light that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, a weight (the rotation of the reel since a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game). A waiting LED 19 for notifying that a replay game is in progress and a replaying LED 20 for notifying that a replay game is in progress are provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 2S, first, a bet amount is set using the points secured by using the card unit 3. In order to use the holding point, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid among the pay lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 1), and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game Is ready to start.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 10 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the lower right direction, the lower stage of the reel 2L, The middle line of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L2 set across the symbols arranged in the upward direction, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the design arranged in a V shape. There are four types of winning lines L3, a lower line of reel 2L, a middle part of reel 2C, a lower part of reel 2R, that is, a winning line L4 set across a reverse V-shaped pattern. It is defined as. Note that the winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L4. For example, the line extending over the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the line extending over the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. Further, it may include a line extending over the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 10.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L4. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a result of display, a prize is generated, and a score determined according to the prize is awarded to the player.

  In the slot machine 2S according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate and the symbols start to change, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  Of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the first stop reel is called the first stop reel, the second stop reel is called the second stop reel, and the last stop reel is called the third stop reel. This reel stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation.

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be drawn and stopped on the winning line. Such reel control is referred to as pull-in control.

  Next, referring to FIG. 2, in the slot machine 2S, a front door 2b is provided to the main body frame 2a so as to be openable and closable with its left edge as a swing center.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are provided near the edge of the front door 2b opposite to the center of swinging. The engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions of the main body frame 2a facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b. When the opened front door 2b is pressed against the main body frame 2a, the engaging projections 6a and 6b get over the engaging receiving pieces 7a and 7b. Move and become locked.

  A front door opening solenoid 110 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the back surface side of the front door 2b. When the front door opening solenoid 110 is excited, a pair of upper and lower members against the biasing force of the spring is provided. The mating projections 6a and 6b are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6a and 6b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b to be unlocked, and the front door 2b is opened.

  The front door closing detector 112 (see FIG. 3) is provided at a position in contact with the front door 2b in the upper part of the main body frame 2a, and the front door 2b is pressed against the main body frame 2a to be locked. Detected.

  Next, an outline of a control circuit for the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S will be described with reference to FIG.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and a CU communication control unit 80 for communicating with the payout control unit 31 of the slot machine 2S. Is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connector 330 for connection to the slot machine 2S side, and the slot machine 2S is provided with a connector 220 for connection to the card unit 3 side. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 31 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 220 and connection wiring.

  When the CPU 805 (see FIG. 6) of the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as disconnection between the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1, it transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 for display. The controller 312 displays an error and controls to turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown).

  Further, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the S-unit communication control unit 82, the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 and sends an error to the display 312. Control is performed so that an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1.

  The currency identifier 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the identification result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the main control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323 and written to the card reader / writer 327 from the main control unit 323. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327. When the CPU 805 determines that the card is an improper card (forged card or the like), an error display command is displayed to the display control unit 797. To display the error on the display 312 and turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) and transmit a notification signal to the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred. .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and display data such as a balance or the number of points is output from the main control unit 323 to the display 312, and the output display data is displayed. The instrument 312 displays. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The slot machine 2S is electrically connected to a main control board 116 that controls the progress of the game of the slot machine 2S (game control) and a payout control unit 31 that transmits information about points and the like to the card unit 3. It is provided in the state. Further, the slot machine 2S is provided with a display effect control board 90 electrically connected to the payout control unit 31, and a display ROM board 92 electrically connected to the display effect control board 90. ing.

  A CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323 on the card unit 3 side. The CU communication control unit 80 and the S unit communication control unit 82 provided in the slot machine 2S are connected to the connector 330 and It is electrically connected via a connector 220. The S-unit communication control unit 82 and the payout control unit 31 are configured by a one-chip LSI 117. Then, various commands such as an addition request, a subtraction request, a game permission / inhibition request, an addition request number, and a subtraction request number are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the S unit communication control unit 82. Is transmitted from the unit 82 to the payout control unit 31. Note that the main control board 116 and the LSI 117 may be integrated into one chip.

  As will be described later, the addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the credits from the prepaid balance are lent or replayed, and the payout control unit 31 receives and updates the number of points received. To do. As will be described later, the subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when a point is divided and transferred (point sharing processing) or a wagon service is performed. Update the subtraction.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 31 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The addition request number is a command for designating a number to be added to the number of points by the above-described addition request command. The subtraction request number is a command for designating the number to be subtracted from the number of points by the subtraction request command described above.

  A game control microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 116. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The main control board 116 includes a random number generation circuit that generates a predetermined range of random numbers, a sampling circuit that acquires random numbers from the random number generation circuit, and the like. The main control board 116 performs an internal lottery for a winning combination using the random number acquired from the random number generation circuit.

  The main control board 116 has a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, a game auxiliary display 12, a payout display 13, a start valid LED 18, a waiting LED 19, and a replay. The LED 20, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected.

  The main control board 116 detects the start operation after setting the bet amount, starts variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), draws the results of one game, and stops each reel in response to the stop operation. Let me.

  Here, processing executed by the main control board 116 in the slot machine 2S will be described.

  In the slot machine 2S of the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are aligned on any winning line of the variable display device constituted by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  In the following, the big bonus may be referred to as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be referred to as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and set a winning flag for the winning combination.

  The “game” in the slot machine 2S, in a narrow sense, refers to a period from when the start switch 7 is operated until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  First, the main control board 116 sets the number of bets by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and starts to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by detecting the operation of the start switch 7. .

  However, if the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage).

  When the number of bets is set and the start switch 7 is operated, the main control board 116 extracts a random number for internal lottery, and assigns to each combination determined according to the gaming state based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not winning is allowed.

  The main control board 116 performs a reel rotation process after the lottery process. In the reel rotation process, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game are processed on the condition that one game regulation time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed since the time counted by one game timer has elapsed. The motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  The main control board 116 stops when a predetermined condition (the reference position is detected by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is satisfied. The operation of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R is made valid. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped.

  When the driving of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the main control board 116 performs a winning determination process for determining whether any predetermined role symbol is derived and displayed on the winning line. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that a winning combination such as BB has been won, a process for controlling the bonus (for example, setting a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  The main control board 116 performs a payout process when the winning determination process ends. In the payout process, an addition number signal indicating the number of points to be given is output to the LSI 117. In the payout process, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied is performed in the bonus (BB or RB) as various processes not related to winning.

  Next, configurations other than the main control board 116 mounted on the slot machine 2S will be described.

  The LSI 117 includes a payout control unit 31. The payout control unit 31 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. Note that the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 116 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 and the payout control unit 31 of the LSI 117 may be integrated into one chip.

  The payout control unit 31 includes a score counter for storing a player's total score separately from the card unit 3. The payout control unit 31 receives an addition request number signal from the card unit 3 if the player performs an operation to secure the score by deducting the valuable value owned by the player, and the payout control unit 31 In response to the addition request number signal, the score counter is added and updated. On the other hand, when the bet amount is set, the payout control unit 31 subtracts and updates the score point counter.

  Further, the front door opening solenoid 110 and the front door closing detector 112 are electrically connected to the LSI 117.

  When the front door closing detector 112 detects the closing of the front door 2b, the detection signal is input to the LSI 117. The LSI 117 transmits a front door opening solenoid excitation signal to the front door opening solenoid 110 to excite the front door opening solenoid 110 and unlock the front door 2b.

  The display effect control board 90 functions as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a work area of the CPU. A random access memory (RAM), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The display effect control board 90 is provided with a display 51, speakers 53 and 54, a chance button 58, and a jog dial 59. The display effect control board 90 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. The display effect control board 90 reads image data by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the display ROM board 92 and transmits the display data to the display 51. Control is performed to display a display screen such as a navigation effect relating to points, bets, or small roles.

  Further, the button input signal of the chance button 58 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 59 are input to the display effect control board 90, and the display effect control board 90 sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the display 51. A display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 59 and the operation of the chance button 58 is displayed on the display 51.

  Next, signals transmitted and received between the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S and between each board of the slot machine 2S will be described.

  From the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 31 of the slot machine 2S, an addition request (holding point +), a subtraction request (holding point-), a game permission request, a game prohibition request, an addition request number, and a subtraction request Both numbers are sent as “commands”.

  The addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the points are lent out by debiting the prepaid balance or the points are lent out by operating the replay button 319. In response to this, the payout control unit 31 adds and updates the number of points. The subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when a point is divided and transferred (point sharing process) or a wagon service is performed. Receiving it, the payout control unit 31 subtracts and updates the number of points.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 31 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The number of addition requests is a command for designating the number of points to be added to the number of points by an addition request command. The subtraction request number is a command for designating the number of points to be subtracted from the number of points by a subtraction request command.

  On the other hand, from the payout control unit 31 of the slot machine 2S to the card unit 3, the number of points indicating the value of the point counter stored in the payout control unit 31, the number of points added according to the winnings, and the number of bets The number of points subtracted according to the setting and external output information indicating various game states and the like are transmitted.

  The external output information includes bet number setting information (indicating the set bet number) transmitted when the bet number is set by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6, and rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Reel start information transmitted at the time of starting, internal winning status information (indicating the winning result) transmitted at the time when the internal lottery is executed by the start operation, and the time when each of the first to third stop operations is executed 1 to 3 stop operation information (indicating the type of stop reel) and result information (indicating the type of winning or winning combination) transmitted when the display result is confirmed.

  From the payout control unit 31 to the main control board 116, a health check command, a prize payout number reception command, and a BET impossible signal are transmitted. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 116 is operating normally. The winning / dispensing number reception command is a command indicating that the addition number transmitted from the main control board 116 has been received.

  The BET impossible signal is a signal indicating that the value of the score counter has become less than the minimum value required for setting the betting number. When the main control board 116 receives this BET disabling signal, the main control board 116 enters a game prohibition state in which a game cannot be newly started thereafter. Specifically, the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 for setting the bet amount is invalidated.

  A connection confirmation signal is returned from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 31. The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 31 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 31. The payout control unit 31 controls the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 31 receives the predetermined voltage signal.

  Further, when the winning is detected, the “addition number +” signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 31, while when the reel rotation is detected to be started, the “subtraction number +” signal is transmitted. Sent. “Addition number +” indicates the number of points to be added according to the winning, and “Subtraction number +” indicates the number of points to be subtracted according to the bet number setting. The payout control unit 31 adds the value of the score counter in response to the “addition number +” signal, and adds the “addition number” for transmission to the card unit 3. Further, the payout control unit 31 subtracts the value of the score counter in accordance with the “subtraction number +” signal and adds the “subtraction number” to be transmitted to the card unit 3.

  Furthermore, various external output information indicating the bet number setting and reel starting described above is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 31. The payout control unit 31 transmits each external output information to the card unit 3 at the timing when the external output information is received. The external output information may be directly transmitted from the main control board 116 to the card unit 3.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 31 to the display effect control board 90. This display device control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit (CU) operation command, a test command, and an effect command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating a gaming state of a slot machine such as BB or RT, and the card unit operation command is a command transmitted in response to the player operating the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the display effect control board 90. The effect command is a command for instructing switching to various effect screens according to the gaming state.

  A command is transmitted from the payout control unit 31 to the display effect control board 90 every 300 ms. The display effect control board 90 detects a line disconnection and performs a time-over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received despite the elapse of a certain time exceeding 300 ms after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command has not been transmitted even though 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by 1, and when the error count is counted 10 times continuously, The effect control board 90 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and controls the display 51 to display an error animation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, main ones of various data stored on each of the CU side and the S platform side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, on the CU side, the fluctuation of the number of points on the S platform is calculated and the current number of points is managed. On the S side, the current number of points is calculated and stored. However, on the S side, the number of points is only to prevent a new game from being started as early as possible when the number of points is less than the minimum number required for setting the number of bets (for example, 0). It is a secondary thing used for. In the present embodiment, since the main management of the number of points is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points on the S platform side, and the cost of the S platform is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, compared to the CU, the S units have a shorter replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. Therefore, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the S machines are introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with the main management function related to the number of points on the S machines side to suppress the costs on the S machines side. is there.

  FIG. 4 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU-side main control unit 323 and RAM storage data mounted on the S-side LSI 117. First, when the power is turned on in a state where the S units (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game arcade, The main chip ID is transmitted from the board 116, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the LSI 117 itself is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, connection time, that is, data of the time when the CU side and the S side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S side, and the transmitted connection time is stored on the S side. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S platform side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the S side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same S units as in the previous time are connected. Note that the connection time data is transmitted from the CU side to the S side when new power is turned on and communication between the CU side and the S side is started. Is stored on the S side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the S platform side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by “1” on the CU side and the S platform side, and the sequence number is updated on the CU side. And S side. The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not the communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the S platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and S units in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the S units in response to the operation instruction, and then receives the SQN from the S units and rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the S units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the S unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU next time, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated for the S units.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 58 to 73 described later, when communication is interrupted during communication, the SQN is backed up and stored until the communication is reconnected. Since the operation response is always transmitted regardless of the time of occurrence (see FIGS. 52 and 58 to 73), the SQN stored in the backup until the communication is reconnected is always the last SQN transmitted. It has become. On the other hand, the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction is transmitted or an operation instruction is received in accordance with the occurrence time of communication disconnection (see FIGS. 52 and 58 to 73), and therefore, until the communication is reconnected. The SQN stored during the backup is either the last transmitted or the last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the S platform side. When an operation response is returned from the S platform to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. The n + 2 sequence number is sent to the S side.

  Next, the current point-related information (point-related information being counted) is transmitted from the S platform to the CU side. This current point related information is stored by each counter in the current point related information storage area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a total of four types of counters including an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter, an external output information counter, and a score counter are provided in the current score related information storage area of the RAM. Yes.

  The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. When a winning occurs in the S units, the main control board 116 transmits an addition number signal that can specify the number of points added to the LSI 117. The LSI 117 adds and updates the addition number counter based on the addition number signal.

  The subtraction number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be subtracted according to the betting number setting. When a bet number setting operation is detected, a bet number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the LSI 117. The LSI 117 adds and updates the subtraction number counter based on the betting number setting signal.

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times the game state has changed. The external output information counter includes a counter that counts the number of bets set by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, and a start operation. A counter that counts the internal winning combination for each winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, a counter that counts the operation according to the first to third stop operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is fixed A counter that counts up at the time, a counter that counts up according to the gaming state when the gaming state changes, and a counter that counts up according to the error type when an error occurs are included.

  Note that counters that count up for each gaming state when the gaming state changes include a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The LSI 117 adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on various types of external output information transmitted from the main control board 116.

  The score counter is a counter for storing the score (total score) of the player at the current time. The LSI 117 adds and updates the point counter by the addition of the addition number counter when adding and updating the addition number counter, and subtracts and updates the point counter by the addition of the subtraction number counter when adding and updating the subtraction number counter. .

  A command requesting data transmission is transmitted from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals. The S units transmit the values of the above four types of counters (addition number counter, subtraction number counter, external output information counter, and score point counter) to the CU at the timing of receiving the command. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the S units have the counter values of the “previous score related information” for each of the three types of counters excluding the score number counter among the above four types of counters. Back up to storage area.

  That is, the value of the addition counter is “addition number”, the value of the subtraction counter is “subtraction number”, the value of the external output information counter is “external output information”, Stored in the area. In addition, when storing in the storage area, the data stored before that is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and saved (rewritten) in the storage area of “previous holding point related information”.

  The addition number counter, subtraction number counter, and external output information counter whose counter values are backed up in the storage area of “previous holding point related information” are then initialized (cleared to 0) to prepare for the next data count. It is done.

  As a result, the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter change the amount of data (points, external output information) since the last data transmission to the CU (untransmitted to the CU). Data) is stored. When the data transmission request is received from the CU next time, the amount of change in data from when the data transmission request was last received until this time when the data transmission request is received is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points at the current stage is stored in the point counter that is not initialized every time data is transmitted. Each time a data transmission request is received from the CU, the total number of points at the current stage is transmitted to the CU. That is, each time the S unit receives a command instructing transmission of the data change amount, the S unit transmits the data change amount from the previous reception of the command to the reception of the current change.

  In other words, the data of addition number, subtraction number, and external output information, which is the current score related information transmitted to the CU immediately before in the storage area of the previous score related information (current score related information transmitted immediately before). Is stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter but also the value of each previous counter that was not transmitted in the next transmission when the current holding point related information is not transmitted from the S side to the CU side. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, a total addition number (addition total), a total subtraction number (subtraction total), an external output information total, and a score are stored in a total data storage area in the RAM.

  The CU updates the total addition number and the number of points based on the value of the addition number counter transmitted from the S platform. Further, the total subtraction number and the number of points are updated based on the value of the subtraction number counter transmitted from the S platform. Furthermore, the cumulative number of external output information is updated based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from the S units. The external output information cumulative number is updated for each type of external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to “number of bets”, “reel start”, “internal winning by winning combination”, “first to third stop operation”, “display result”, “game state change”, The number (number of times) is accumulated.

  In this way, the CU can manage the latest score by updating the score based on the current score-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Similarly, the CU can manage the latest information by updating the total number of additions, the total number of subtractions, and the total number of external output information with the current point-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Become.

  Note that the CU receives the count value of the score counter in addition to the values of the addition counter and the subtraction counter from the S side, but the score stored by itself is stored in the addition counter and the subtraction counter. Updating based on the value, the count value of the point counter sent from the S platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of points sent from the S platform does not match the number of scores managed on the CU side, the score on the CU side is updated with the number of scores sent from the S platform. It will never be done.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform with the current score updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, error notification is performed by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer). Error notification by 1) may be performed), or a predetermined notification for encouraging an artificial response by an attendant may be considered.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU may generate a command for instructing the number of points to be corrected to the number of points managed by the CU side, and transmit the command to the S units. Conceivable. In this case, the S units are provided with a function of correcting the number of points stored therein according to the correction instruction command. The correction instruction command may be a command specifying the number of points managed on the CU side, or the difference between the number of points managed on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side. It is good also as a command which shows.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the S platform, and calculates and manages the current number of points based on the value of the addition / subtraction number counter in particular, and manages it. have. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the S units. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the score becomes 0, the score is also stored on the S platform side. However, a score counter for storing the score on the S side may not be provided.

  The CU does not match the function of performing the score number coincidence determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated current score number with the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform. It sometimes has a function of performing control to shift to an error state (error control at mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the score is stored on the S side, but it can be determined whether or not the score matches the score stored and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of points stored on the gaming machine side does not coincide with the number of points stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU side. For example, the number of points stored on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. May be received to determine whether or not both are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a medal and a storage area for storing a card balance of the accepted (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The CU main control unit 323 (see FIG. 3) stores a medal according to an input requesting the use of the medal (for example, a press input of a replay button 319 (see FIG. 3) provided on the CU). A predetermined number of stored medals is subtracted from the storage area. Further, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 3) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation for deducting the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, points recorded on the card, or the number of stored medals) and using it for the game, An addition request number for adding the number of points to be deducted to the point number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side. In response to this, the S platform side adds and updates the score counter.

  On the other hand, when an operation for ordering a so-called wagon service, in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like, is executed, the number of subtraction requests for the player-owned game value is received from the CU side. S is sent to the S side. In response to this, the S platform side subtracts and updates the score counter.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for describing a control mode in which game history data is stored on each of the CU side and the S platform side. Note that the game history data is data indicating a game state history generated by a player playing a game with the S-unit 2S. For example, the number of start times (reel start times, that is, the number of games), The number of occurrences of a big bonus, the number of occurrences of RT, the number of starts from the previous big bonus to the current big bonus, the base value, and the like. The game history data includes game history data throughout the day on the S units and game history data aggregated for each player on the S units. As will be described in detail later, the former game history data is stored in the S game history data storage unit provided on both the S and CU sides, and the latter game history data is stored on the S and CU sides. Are stored in the current player game history data storage unit provided in both or the backup storage unit provided only on the S platform side. In other words, the game history data for the entire day at the S units and the game history data aggregated for each player at the S units are stored in both the CU3 and the S unit 2S.

  Referring to FIG. 5, when a player plays a game with S units 2S, various game data such as a big bonus is generated, and the game data is input to game history data management unit 291. The normal game data generated as a result of the player playing the game on the S units is totaled, for example, by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 31, and the totaled game history Data is input to the display effect control unit 292 provided on the display effect control board 90, and the game history data is accumulated and stored in the S game history data storage unit. This S game history data storage unit can store game history data for 10 days including today's game history data. When the player operates the jog dial 59 and the chance button 58 to select the game history data on the day to be displayed, the game history data on the selected day is displayed on the display 51. The communication between the display effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291 is a one-way communication from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292.

  On the other hand, the above-described game data input to the game history data management unit 291 is also transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 provided in the main control unit 323, for example, via the CU communication control unit 80 of the CU3. The game data is aggregated by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. The accumulated game history data is stored in the S game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. This S machine game history data storage unit on the CU3 side is configured to store only the game history data of the day. If the player touches the display 312 configured with a touch panel to display the S game history data, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data is displayed. Under the control of the management unit 391, the game history data of the current day stored in the current S game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, the CU 3 is configured such that the game history data of the other S units 2S installed in the game hall can be displayed on the display 312. Specifically, when the player touches the operation button icon of the other S unit information display displayed on the display 312, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the other S unit information is displayed. The other S game history data request notification is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the hall management computer 1 by the operation of the processing unit. The hall management computer 1 receives the game history data of the other S units 2S via the other CU 3, and returns the received other S unit game history data to the game history data management unit 391. The game history data management unit 391 processes the returned other S game history data by the other S information processing unit, and processes the processed other S game history data to the other S game of the data storage unit 392. Store in the history data storage unit. The stored other S game history data is displayed on the display 312.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to aggregate game history data for each player who has played a game on the S platform 2S and display the game history data for each player on the display devices 51 and 312. In order to tabulate the game history data for each player, it is necessary to distinguish the players who are playing the game on the S units 2S. C-ID (card ID) stored in a member card possessed by a player who is a member is used as player identification information for distinguishing the player. The C-ID is an ID that is stored in a card and identifies the cards. The member card is issued to a player who becomes a member in the game hall, and the member and the member card have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card can identify not only the member card but also a member player. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card functions as player identification information for identifying the player.

  As will be described in detail later, when a player who is a member inserts a member card into the CU 3, the C-ID stored in the inserted member card is read, and the C-ID is stored in the data storage unit 392. It is stored in the player game history data storage unit. On the other hand, the read C-ID is transmitted from the CU 3 to the S unit 2S, and the S unit 2S transmits the received C-ID from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292 to display the display effect. The current player game history data storage unit of the control unit 292 is stored.

  In this state, when the player plays a game with the S-unit 2S, the game history data from when the C-ID is stored in the current player game history data storage unit is the current player of the display effect control unit 292. Cumulatively stored in the game history data storage unit. When the player operates the jog dial 59 and the chance button 58 to display his / her own game history data, the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display. 51. In addition, the game history data management unit 391 also counts the game history data by the normal mode processing unit based on the game data transmitted from the S units 2S, and stores the C in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. -The game history data accumulated by the normal mode processing unit from the stage where A is stored as an ID is accumulated and stored in the current player game history data storage unit. When the player touches the display 312 including a touch panel and performs an operation for displaying his / her game history data, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data management unit 391. Controls the display 312 to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392.

  As described above, the game history data throughout the day at the S unit and the game history data aggregated for each player at the S unit are displayed on both the S side and the CU side by the display switching operation. One game history data and the other game history data are switched and displayed.

  When the player playing a game with the S platform 2S presses the return button 322 to return the member card inserted, the member card is discharged from the CU3. Then, the game history data management unit 391 erases the C-ID and game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. As a result, even if the display 312 is operated to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit, the game history a is not displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, when the membership card is discharged from CU3, a card return notification is transmitted from the CU to the S unit 2S, and the game history data management unit 291 that has received the card return notification returns the card to the display effect control unit 292. Send a notification. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores A as the C-ID stored in the current player game history data storage unit and the game history data a in the backup data storage unit, so that the current player game The C-ID and game history data in the history data storage unit are deleted. As a result, even if an operation for displaying the game history data a on the display device 51 is performed, the game history data a is not displayed on the display device 51.

  The return button 322 is normally operated to end the game by the S unit 2S. However, the player temporarily stops the game, returns to the S unit 2S where the game was played again, and played the game again. May resume. In such a case, usually after performing a game interruption operation described later, the card is ejected, the card is brought to the player, the player completes the small use, and returns to the same S unit 2S again to return the card to the CU3. Although it is inserted, the player may press the return button 322 to remove the card without performing such a game interruption operation, and may leave the S table 2S.

  In such a case, if the same player who has left the other player without playing a game at the S unit 2S returns to the S unit 2S and inserts the membership card into the CU 3 again, he leaves the seat. It is desirable to take over the previous game history data of the player and add and update the game history data after the game has been resumed to the game history data for cumulative storage. In order to realize this, the C-ID and game history data are backed up and stored in the backup data storage unit provided in the display effect control unit 292 described above. When the player who has returned to the S unit 2S inserts the member card into the CU 3, the card information of the member card is read and the inserted card information including the C-ID of the member card is transferred from the CU 3 to the S unit 2S. Sent. In the S unit 2S, the game history data management unit 291 receives the C-ID included in the inserted card information, and transmits the received C-ID to the display effect control unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 compares the transmitted C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and determines whether or not they match. If they match, it is determined that the same player as the player who has left the seat has resumed the game, and A as the C-ID and a as the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit are stored in the current game. It returns to the player game history data storage unit and stores it in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, the stored data in the backup data storage unit is deleted. Game history data generated after the player played the game with the S unit 2S in a state where the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is stored in the current player game history data storage unit and taken over. Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the comparison result between the C-ID included in the inserted card information transmitted from the CU 3 and the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit does not match, the backup data A as C-ID and a as game history data stored in the storage unit are deleted.

  As a modification, the following control may be performed after the communication between the game history data management unit 291 and the display effect control unit 292 is bidirectional communication.

  A comparison result between the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit by the display effect control unit 292 and the C-ID transmitted from the CU 3, and a determination result as to whether or not they match is the display effect control unit. 292, and transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 of CU3 via the game history data management unit 291. In the game history data management unit 391, if the transmitted C-ID determination result matches, the game history data management unit 391 uses the C-ID determined to match as the current player game history of the data storage unit 392. Store in the data storage unit. In the case of the determination result that the C-ID determination results match, the game history data a is included in the C-ID determination result. The game history data management unit 391 that has received the game history data a stores the game history data a in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Thereafter, if the player plays a game with the S unit 2S, the game data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391, and is aggregated by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated. In this state, if the player performs an operation of touching the display 312 to display his / her own game history data, the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as described above. Displayed by the instrument 312.

  Note that the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 may be controlled so as to erase the backup data stored when a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a test hit mode (test mode) processing function is provided. The trial hit mode is a mode in which a shipping inspection at the time of manufacture of a gaming machine by a gaming machine manufacturer, an operation check at the time of installing a gaming machine at a gaming hall, and the like. When a game attendant inserts a test card for test hit mode into the CU 3, the card information of the test card is read and the test hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 performs processing for shifting to the test hit mode. . Specifically, the test hit mode notification is transmitted to the S unit 2S, and the game history data management unit 291 that has received the test hit mode notification transmits the test hit mode notification to the display effect control unit 292 by the operation of the test hit mode processing unit. . In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores game history data based on game data generated thereafter in the trial hit game history data storage unit. The trial hit game history data storage unit is configured by a storage area different from the S game history data storage unit, the current player game history data storage unit, and the backup data storage unit described above. The game history data in the trial hit mode is stored in the part.

  Then, the game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 51.

  Also in CU3, the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the S unit 2S is totalized by the operation of the trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391, and the totaled game history data is in the trial hit mode. Is displayed on the display 312 as game history data.

  In the display 312, operation button icons such as a recounting button are also displayed. When the game history data in the trial hit mode displayed in the total display is viewed, the game history data in the trial hit mode is to be displayed again. Touch the recount button icon. Then, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and a recounting notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the game history data management unit 291 of the S units 2S. Receiving it, the game history data management unit 291 transmits a recount command to the display effect control unit 292. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 once erases the game history data stored in the test hit game history data storage unit, and then replays game data based on the game data generated thereafter, and stores the test hit game history data. Control to be stored in the unit is performed. Then, the game data of the trial hit game history data storage unit that has been re-calculated is displayed on the display 51. On the other hand, also on the CU3 side, the test hit mode processing unit has a game history based on the game data transmitted from the S unit 2S after the detection signal of the touch operation of the recount button icon is input to the game history data management unit 391. The test hit mode game history data that has been aggregated and recalculated is displayed on the display 312.

  The S units send a re-aggregation command to the game history data management unit 391 based on the reception of the radio signal (re-aggregation command signal) output from the remote controller, and the game history data management unit 391 notifies the re-aggregation notification. May be transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the S unit 2S. Alternatively, a recount command may be sent to the game history data management unit 391 based on the detection of the opening of the S front doors. In the case of such modification, the recount button icon may be displayed together, and the recount button icon may be omitted.

  Then, when the return button 322 is pressed and the test card accepted by the CU 3 is discharged, a card return notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the S unit 2S, and the card return notice is received. The game history data management unit 291 transmits a card return notification to the display effect control unit 292, and the display effect control unit 292 that receives the card return notification erases the game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit.

  When there are no more points in the trial hit mode, a point addition instruction is sent from the CU side to the S units to add the points, thereby enabling a game. When there are no more points in the test hit mode, the game may be made possible by automatically adding points on the S side without sending a point addition command from the CU side to the S units. Furthermore, instead of automatically adding points on the S side, it is allowed to continue to set the number of bets even if the points become 0, so that the game can be continued. May be.

  A RAM clear switch 293 is provided in the S base 2S. The RAM clear switch 293 is used to clear the stored data of the RAM by outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 31 when the switch is operated. If the RAM clear output signal is input to the game history data management unit 291, the RAM clear signal is input to the display effect control unit 292, and the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 is stored. In addition to being erased, the oldest stored data of the 10 days of stored data in this S game history data storage unit will be erased, and the remaining 9 days of stored data will be shifted one by one to the old day storage area Remembered. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area). In response to the output of the RAM clear signal, the game history data of the newest day (game history data before shifting to the old day) in the S game history data storage unit is displayed on the display effect control unit 292, the game history. The data may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1 via the data management unit 291 and the game history data management unit 391 so that the data is backed up and stored in the hall management computer 1.

  In addition, the game history data management unit 291 that has received the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear processing unit 293 transmits a clear notification to the CU 3, and the game history data management unit 391 that has received the clear notification receives the S of the data storage unit 392. Control is performed to erase the game history data stored in the table game history data storage unit. As a result, the display of the current P game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared).

  Note that while the card is being inserted into the CU 3, the game history data is not cleared even if a RAM clear signal is output based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 293.

  The S units may output a RAM clear signal to the main control board 116 or the payout control unit 31 based on reception of a radio signal (RAM clear command signal) output from the remote controller. Alternatively, a clear switch is provided on the CU side so that when the CU detects the operation of this clear switch, a RAM clear signal is transmitted from the CU to the S units. The RAM clear signal may be output to the main control board 116 or the payout control unit 31 based on the reception. In these cases, the RAM clear switch 293 may or may not be provided.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the control circuit of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 and the contents of the stored authentication information. Referring to FIG. 6, the main control unit 323 functions as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 805 serving as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 804 storing a control program and data, and a work area for the CPU 805. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 806, an I / O port 807, and an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable PROM) 808 are provided.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 is also provided with a CPU 810 as a control center, a ROM 809 that stores control programs and data, a RAM 811 that functions as a work area for the CPU 810, an I / O port 812, and an EEPROM 813. .

  The main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 communicate with each other through the I / O ports 807 and 812. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the I / O port 807 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the upper server 801. The I / O port 812 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the S unit communication control unit 81.

  In the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID (unique ID) of the CU communication control unit is stored. The SID of this CU communication control unit is also referred to as an IC serial ID. There are two types of mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80: authentication using this SID and authentication using an authentication key (common key) described later. As will be described in detail later, the authentication using the SID is performed by storing each other's own SID and the other party's SID and determining whether or not the other party stores the correct SID by a challenge response method described later. Is. As described later, this SID authentication includes BB serial ID authentication and CU communication control unit serial ID authentication, which are collectively referred to as serial ID authentication. As will be described later, authentication using an authentication key stores authentication keys composed of a common key and authenticates whether or not the stored authentication keys match each other. This is called authentication.

  As described above, the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 stores the SID of the CU communication control unit at the chip manufacturing stage. Therefore, the main control unit 323 also needs to store both its own SID and the other party, that is, the CU communication control unit SID stored in the CU communication control unit 80.

  In the manufacturing stage of CU3, the SID and authentication key (common key) of the main control unit are written in the EEPROM 813 by the ROM writer or the like, and the SID of the main control unit is written in the EEPROM 808. The SID of this main control unit is also referred to as a BB serial ID.

  In the case of mutual authentication by SID, it is necessary to store the SID of the other party and one's own, and also in the case of mutual authentication using an authentication key consisting of a common key, It is necessary to keep. However, at the stage where the CU is manufactured, the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are not stored in the main control unit 323. The SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 7, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, S-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 31, or main control board 116, it is indicated by an arrow in FIG. Notification is made. The abnormality mentioned here may be that the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the S-unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 31, or the main control board 116 is replaced with other illegally manufactured ones, noise, etc. This includes a case where a malfunction occurs or a failure occurs due to the above, or an offline state due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 7 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each SID of the main control unit. The key management server 803 is a key management server that can communicate with the main control board 116.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 described above. Detect. In this mutual authentication, in addition to the above-described serial ID authentication and device authentication, device authentication using a session key described later (see FIG. 24) is also included. When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. Then, the display control unit 797 is controlled to display that the display 312 indicates that an abnormality has occurred, and an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked to notify the abnormality. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit 324 to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of an abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the S unit communication control unit 81. When the S-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, it notifies the payout control unit 31 to that effect, and the payout control unit 31 further notifies the main control board 116 to that effect. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 116 outputs a signal for lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp provided on the film plate or the like, and a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1. Send.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the mutual authentication described above, and sends a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that to the S unit communication control unit. 81 is notified. In response to this, the S unit communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 31 that an abnormality has occurred. In response, the payout control unit 31 notifies the main control board 116 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 116 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the S-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the fact, and the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 of the fact.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality of the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the S unit communication control unit 81 of the fact, while when detecting an abnormality of the S unit communication control unit 81, the fact is notified. To the main control unit 323, and the notification destination of the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the CU communication control unit 80 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The S communication control unit 81 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the payout control unit 31 to that effect, and the payout control unit 31 notifies that the abnormality has occurred. To notify. In response to the notification, the main control board 116 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the S-station communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 detects that fact and notifies the main control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. The main control unit 323 notifies the above-described abnormality notification. In addition to performing control, the host server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality has occurred in the S-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality has occurred in the payout control unit 31, the payout control unit 31 detects that an abnormality has occurred, and the fact that the abnormality has occurred is mainly described. Notify the control board 116. In response to the notification, the main control board 116 performs the above-described abnormality notification control.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 31, the main control board 116 detects the abnormality and performs the above-described abnormality occurrence notification control. If an abnormality has occurred in the payout control unit 31 and no abnormality has occurred in the S-unit communication control unit 81, the S-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and indicates that the abnormality has occurred. Notify the controller 80. Upon receiving the notification, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the above-described control for abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both the S-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 31, the main control board 116 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects the occurrence of the abnormality.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 116, the payout control unit 31 detects the abnormality and notifies the S-unit communication control unit 81 that the abnormality has occurred. The S unit communication control unit 81 receives the notification and notifies the CU communication control unit 80 that an abnormality has occurred, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives the notification and notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. . In response to this, the main control unit 323 controls the above-described abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, the LSI 117 detects and notifies the main control board 116 when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80, and detects that when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 116. The CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Similarly to the above-described CU communication control unit 80, the LSI 117 is also not controlled for abnormality notification even if notification is given to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred when it is detected that abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. Note that the CU communication control unit 80 and the LSI 117 are not connected to abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and do not have a function of performing abnormality notification control on their own even if an abnormality is detected. .

  Next, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 shows a transmission direction, names of transmission information, and an outline thereof. Data with a transmission direction of CU to S units is a command, and data with a transmission direction of S units to CU is a response.

  A recovery request command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This recovery request command requests the S units to transmit recovery information.

  A response of the recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held in S units to the CU.

  A communication start request is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This communication start request requests the S units to clear the recovery information and back up the connection ID (communication start time).

  A communication start response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This communication start response notifies the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This operation instruction instructs a game operation to the S units and requests transmission of game table information such as points.

  An operation response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This operation response notifies the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and also notifies game table information such as points.

  A communication disconnection request is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This communication disconnection request requests the S units to disconnect the communication connection.

  A communication disconnection response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This communication disconnection response notifies the CU that a communication disconnection request command has been received.

  A communication test request is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This communication test request notifies the S units of communication data.

  A communication test response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This communication test response is a response of communication data to the CU.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, an outline of commands and responses performed between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit will be described. 9 and 10 show the transmission direction, the name of the transmission information, and an outline thereof. The transmission direction is a command from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit, and the transmission direction is data from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A BB serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This BB serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The BB serial ID is the SID of the main control unit 323 described above. This command is not sent up to S units but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A second BB serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second BB serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Next, an IC serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the IC serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This IC serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The IC serial ID is the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 described above.

  An IC serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying IC serial ID authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  The second IC serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second IC serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request 1) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command (device authentication request 2) for requesting second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (device authentication response 2) for notifying the second device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Device authentication requests 1 and 2 and device authentication responses 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 29 described later.

  Counter information notification for notifying counter information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A counter information notification response for notifying the counter information notification result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The counter information notification and the counter information notification response will be described with reference to FIG.

  A writer management information request for requesting writer management information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A writer management information response notifying the writer management information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The writer management information request and the writer management information response will be described with reference to FIG. The data included in the writer management information response includes a command code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, and the like.

  The main control unit requests the CU communication control unit to update the authentication key, but transmits an authentication key update request.

  Data included in the authentication key update request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and a MAC. include.

  An authentication key update response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (time response) that is a notification that a time notification command has been received is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (S-unit communication control unit authentication request) requesting authentication with the S-unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the S unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the S unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (S unit communication control unit authentication response) for notifying an authentication result with the S unit communication control unit is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one. The CU communication control unit 80 obtains information such as the chip ID of the main control board 116 and the LSI 117 and then returns an authentication result to the main control unit 323.

  A device information request for requesting device information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A device information response notifying device information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting a communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This communication (transmission) state is a command for requesting whether or not the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is normal. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying the communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This is a response in which the CU communication control unit determines whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is appropriate, and returns the determination result to the main control unit. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command for requesting re-authentication with the S-unit communication control unit (S-unit communication control unit re-authentication request) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the S unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the S unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (S unit communication control unit re-authentication response) for notifying the response of the S unit communication control unit re-authentication request message is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The CU communication control unit re-executes authentication between the S unit communication control units, and the main control unit acquires the authentication result by receiving the S unit communication control unit re-authentication response. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one.

  A BB serial ID authentication request A for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request A will be described in detail later. This command is not sent up to S units but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response A for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A BB serial ID authentication request B for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This command is not sent up to S units but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response B for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The BB serial ID authentication requests A and B and the BB serial ID authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG. Device authentication requests A and B and device authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request A) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response A) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command for requesting device authentication (device authentication request B) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response B) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one.

  An authentication key setting request for requesting an authentication key update is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The authentication key setting request is a response for notifying the main control unit of the authentication key setting information, and the authentication key information written in from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer) (the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 in FIG. 7). ) From the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Information included in the authentication key setting request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and an encryption key. Padding character (random number), MAC. Except for the command code, the code information is encrypted and transmitted using the BB serial ID as an encryption key using the ECB block encryption mode.

  An authentication key setting response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The authentication key setting response is a command for notifying the CU communication control unit of the authentication key information setting result. Information included in the authentication key setting response includes a command code, a command size, an update result, an encryption padding character (random number), and a MAC. Other than the command code, the ECB block cipher mode is used for encryption and transmission using the BB serial ID as an encryption key.

  Next, based on FIGS. 11 to 19, among the commands / responses shown in FIGS. 8 and 10, the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, the operation response, the communication status response, the device information response, The contents will be described in detail.

  First, the recovery response will be described with reference to FIG. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information (recovery data) held in S units to the CU. This “recovery information” refers to the data stored in the backup storage for the S unit to send to the CU as a recovery response when the CU sends a recovery request command to the S units as the recovery process is executed. That is. As shown in FIG. 11, the recovery information transmitted from the S units to the CU includes a connection time, a final sequence number, a C-ID, a previous point-related information, and a current point-related information.

  The column of “encryption” shown in FIG. 11 and after is a column indicating whether or not the data to be transmitted is encrypted. The symbol “X” indicates that the data is not encrypted and the symbol “◯” indicates that it is encrypted. The key used for this encryption uses a session key (also called a telegram key), which will be described later.

  The connection time is a connection time backed up by the S units (connection time data received from the CU at the start of communication). The final sequence number is a sequence number received from the CU and backed up by S units. The C-ID is a C-ID that was backed up on the S units. Previously held point related information refers to the previously reported point related information, the previous added number that is the previously notified addition number, the previous subtracted number that is the previously notified subtraction number, and the previously output external output information Each piece of external output information.

  The current point-related information is the latest point-related information, and is the number of current points that are the number of points currently held in S units, the current number of points that is the number of additions currently held in S units, The current subtraction number, which is the subtraction number currently held by the S units, and the external output information currently held by the S units.

  Note that the information marked with * in FIG. 11 is data to be backed up by S units, and ALL0 is set at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indefinite.

  FIG. 16 shows the meanings and determination points of various numbers in (Note 1) shown in FIG. The meanings of various numbers and the contents of the confirmation points are as shown in FIG. 16, but a supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The number of points is the number of points held by the S units. The CU checks whether the number of points on the S units matches the number of points after the correction of the CU. If they do not match, the CU sends a communication disconnection request command to the S units and disconnects the communication. At the same time, S games are stopped (see FIG. 52, etc.). Then, the CU executes the recovery process, and transmits a communication start request to the S units (see FIG. 33), thereby changing the score correction request to the S units in accordance with the data correction request included in the communication start request command. And processing for correcting the number of points of the S units to the number of points after correcting on the CU side.

  The number of additions indicates the number to be added to the score by “winning”, but does not include the “addition request number” transmitted from the CU. The CU adds and updates the held points based on the addition number data transmitted from the S units. However, the CU does not add the score when it receives this data without holding the card.

  The subtraction number indicates the number of points subtracted from the point by setting the bet number, but does not include the number of subtraction requests transmitted from the CU. The CU subtracts and updates the number of held points based on the subtraction number data transmitted from the S units. However, the CU does not subtract the score when receiving this data without holding the card, and the CU does not subtract when the score held by the CU is 0. .

  The external output information is information indicating various game states and the like. The S units back up all external output information notified to the CU as previous external output information, and clear the current external output information to zero. The external output information includes a plurality of types shown in FIG.

  The betting number setting information is information indicating the betting number set for one game. The reel start information is information indicating that the reel has started to rotate. The start operation information is information indicating that a start operation for starting the rotation of the reel has been performed after the betting number is set. The internal winning status information is information indicating a winning result (including a miss) of a combination such as a big bonus, bonus, small combination (by type), or replay. In this slot machine, for example, a random value is extracted at the timing when the start operation is detected, and the winning determination is made, and this internal winning status information is transmitted from the S units to the CU at that timing.

  The first to third stop operation information is information indicating that the first stop operation has been performed on the reel, that the second stop operation has been performed, and that the third stop operation has been performed. Output when an operation is detected. The first to third stop information is information indicating each of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reel. The result confirmation information is information indicating that all reels have stopped and the result (the type of winning or winning combination). The CU receives these external output information from the S units and stores them.

  Next, referring to FIG. 12, the communication start request command requests the S units to correct the score and sequence number and to back up a new communication ID (communication start time).

  Specific data of this communication start request includes connection time, data correction request, sequence number, and score data, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The connection time is the time when the communication between the CU and the S unit is started. The connection time is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the S unit. This connection time is used as a communication connection ID.

  The data correction request is a request from the CU to correct data to the S units, and is composed of 3 bits of Bit0 to Bit2. Bit 0 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a clear request. When it is “0”, there is no clear request, and when it is “1”, clear request is designated. When there is a clear request, a request to clear 0 backup data held on the S side, such as “score”, “sequence number”, “addition number”, “subtraction number”, “external output information”, etc. Made.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a sequence number correction request. When it is “0”, there is no sequence number correction request, and when it is “1”, the sequence number correction request is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a point correction request. When it is “0”, it is designated that there is a point correction request, and when it is “1”, there is no point correction request. Bits 3 to 7 are reserved.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 20 and subsequent figures, when the bit specifying the presence / absence of a request is “0”, it is expressed as “no request”, and when it is “1”, it is expressed as “present request”. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when “0”, “clear request not present”. Also, as indicated in parentheses in the data correction request column, “Clear request” is “Recovery clear”, “Sequence number correction request” is “SQN correction”, and “Point correction request” is “Point correction”. ".

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is a sequence number stored in the CU. The score is the number of points stored in the CU.

  The CU backs up the connection time and backs up the “main chip ID” and the “payout chip ID” when transmitting the communication start request command.

The S units perform the following processing when receiving this communication start request.
When the clear request is ON, the backup data held on the S side such as “scoring point”, “sequence number”, “addition number”, “subtraction number”, “external output information”, etc. is cleared to zero.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the notified sequence number is overwritten with the sequence number held on the S units.

When the point correction request is ON, the point held by the S units is overwritten on the notified point.
Back up the connection time.

Each process performed on the S units is executed in order from the top.
Next, the operation instruction command shown in FIG. 13 performs “adding points”, “subtracting points”, “allowing / inhibiting game”, and “clearing points and sequence numbers” operations for the S units. In addition to instructing, transmission of various game machine information is requested. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of the S units.

  The data included in the operation instruction command includes “operation request”, “CU state”, “addition request number”, “subtraction request number”, and “card balance” as shown in FIG.

  As an operation request, 6-bit data of Bit0 to Bit5 is transmitted from the CU to the S units. With respect to Bit 0, when “1”, a score addition request is instructed, and when it is “0”, a score addition request is not requested. For Bit1, “1” indicates that there is a score subtraction request, and “0” indicates that there is no score subtraction request. As for Bit2, “1” indicates that a game permission is requested, and “0” indicates that no game permission is requested.

  For Bit 3, “1” indicates that there is a game prohibition request, and “0” indicates that there is no game prohibition request. With regard to Bit 4, when the number is "1", the clearing of the score and sequence number is instructed, and when it is "0", the clearing of the score and sequence number is not requested.

  The S units determine whether or not the game can be started by comprehensively considering “game permission / game prohibition” set by the CU, the remaining number of points held by the S units, the error state of the S units, and the like. The opportunity for the S units to change the setting value of the game permission is when a game permission request is received from the CU. The opportunity for the S units to change the setting value for prohibiting the game is when a game prohibition request is received from the CU, when communication disconnection is detected, or when the S units are powered on.

Bit 5 is used for a front door opening request (front door opening request).
When a plurality of bits of Bit0 to Bit5 are “1”, the S units execute in order from Bit0.

  In addition, data of the number of addition requests that is valid only when the operation request Bit 0 is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This addition request count data indicates a value to be added to the score.

  Data of the number of subtraction requests that is valid only when the operation request Bit1 is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This subtraction request number data indicates a value to be subtracted from the number of points.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 14 (a), for each bit of the operation request of the operation instruction command, in particular, the timing when the CU transmits the data and the operation of the S units that received the data will be described in detail. To do.

  First, the opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit 0 “scoring score addition request” data is when the prepaid balance is consumed or when the score is deducted by replaying the stored medal. Receiving this, the S units add the value of the number of addition requests indicated by the received data to the holding points held by itself.

  The opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit1 “score number subtraction request” data is the timing of subtracting the score by the wagon service, or the sharing timing for sharing the score with other players. Receiving this, the S units subtract the value of the subtraction request number indicated by the received data from the holding point held by itself.

  The opportunity for the CU to transmit the “game permission request” data of Bit 2 is the timing of switching from game prohibition to game permission. Receiving this, the S platform permits the game by the player. Specifically, the betting operation is permitted.

  The opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit 3 “game prohibition request” data is the timing of switching from game permission to game prohibition. The S units that have received this prohibit the game by the player. Specifically, betting operations are prohibited.

  The opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit 4 “Clear Points and Sequence Number Request” data is the card return timing. Receiving this, the S units clear their own holding points and sequence numbers to zero.

  The opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit 5 “front door opening request” data is when a request to open the front door is detected. Receiving this, the S cars enter the game prohibition state by prohibiting the betting operation, and then release the lock state of the front door after a predetermined wait time has elapsed.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the “CU state” of the operation instruction command will be described. The “CU state” data of the operation instruction command is composed of 6 bits of Bit0 to Bit5. As shown in FIG. 13, Bit 0 to Bit 5 are “card holding”, “card insertion processing”, “addition display”, “subtraction display”, “clear display”, “trial hit mode”, respectively. It corresponds to.

  Here, the data of these “CU states” will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, Bit 0 indicates whether or not the card is held on the CU side. When it is 1, it indicates that the card is being held, and when it is 0, it indicates that the card is not held. Bit 1 indicates whether or not the card insertion process (card information reading, verification, etc.) is performed after the card is inserted on the CU side until the balance is fixed. Indicates that the card is not being inserted. Bit2 indicates whether or not addition display for adding and updating the score is being performed on the CU side, and indicates that the score addition display is in the case of 1, and other than the score addition display in the case of 0. Bit3 indicates whether or not subtraction display for subtracting and updating the score on the CU side is in progress, and indicates that the score subtraction display is in the case of 1, and other than the point subtraction display in the case of 0. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the score and sequence number are being cleared and displayed on the CU side, and indicates clear display when 1 and other than clear display when 0.

  Next, Bit 5 indicates whether or not the trial hit mode is in effect, and when Bit 5 is “1”, it indicates that the trial hit mode is in effect. During the trial hit mode, the CU ignores the addition number and subtraction number data notified from the S units, and if it detects that the S side points have reached 0, Add points automatically.

  This CU state is composed of 6 bits of Bit0 to Bit5, but it may be composed of 16 bits of Bit0 to Bit15 so that the following information can be transmitted by each bit.

Bit0: 1 = Card insertion processing Bit1: 1 = Cash insertion processing Bit2: 1 = General card (visitor card) holding Bit3: 1 = Member card holding Bit4: 1 = Test card holding Bit7-5: Reserve Bit8 : 1 = Prepaid loan display in progress Bit9: 1 = Replay loan display in progress Bit10: 1 = Rewarded medals split display (in shared medals display)
Bit11: 1 = Wagon service is displayed Bit12: 1 = Clear is displayed Bit13: 1 = Breaking Bit15-14: Reserved Note that these CU status data are provided for display control on the S side. Whether or not the display control is performed using the data is left to the specifications on the S side. In this embodiment, a slot machine that performs display control based on these data is assumed, but the display control is not essential.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the “addition request number” of the operation instruction command will be described. The “addition request number” data indicates a value to be added to the score. This data is valid only when Bit 0 = 1 of the “operation request”. Next, the “subtraction request count” data of the operation instruction command indicates a value to be subtracted from the score. This data is valid only when Bit 1 = 1 of the “operation request”.

  Next, the “card balance” data of the operation instruction command indicates the prepaid balance of the card inserted in the CU. The C-ID transmitted from the CU to the S units is set with the following data depending on the state. When the card is not inserted, “ALL00h” is set. While the card is held, the C-ID of the card is set. “ALLFFh” is set during the test hit mode.

  It should be noted that during the holding of the card, the data may be such that the card inserted into the CU can be distinguished depending on whether the card is a membership card or a visitor card. For example, “holding card” is composed of 2 bits, and the first bit is set to “1” while the membership card is held, and the second bit is set to “1” while the visitor card is held. Furthermore, in the case of a visitor card, the card is basically kept in the CU at all times, so in the case of a visitor card, the card is held only when there is a balance in the visitor card. It may be controlled so that the C-ID is transmitted as (when Bit is 1). Further, the C-ID may not be stored in the visitor card, but the C-ID may be stored only in the member card.

  Further, an error code being displayed on the CU is transmitted from the CU to the S platform. Note that “ALL00h” is transmitted as the data of the CU error code in which no error has occurred.

  Next, the operation response will be described with reference to FIG. This response of the operation response notifies the CU of game table information such as the execution result of the instruction operation and the number of points.

  As the sequence number, a value obtained by incrementing the sequence number received by the operation instruction is created, and this value is included in the operation response.

The C-ID is a C-ID that is backed up by S units.
As an execution result, 6-bit data of Bit0 to Bit5 is transmitted from the S units to the CU.

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 15, “reduction of score addition” is also simply referred to as “addition rejection”, “reduction of score subtraction” is also simply referred to as “subtraction rejection”, and “game permission rejection” is set. It is also simply referred to as “permission denial”, “game prohibition denial” is also simply referred to as “prohibition denial”, “clearing rejection of the number of points and sequence number” is also simply referred to as “clear denial”, and “glass door opening denial” is simply referred to as “ It is also called “glass refusal”

  For Bit0, when “1”, an execution result of rejection of the score addition is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that addition of the score is not rejected is indicated. For Bit1, when “1”, the execution result of the score subtraction refusal is shown, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the subtraction of the score is not rejected is shown. As for Bit2, when “1”, the execution result of the game permission rejection is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the game permission is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition rejection is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit4, when it is “1”, the number of points and sequence number clear rejection execution results are shown, and when it is “0”, the score and sequence number clear execution results are not rejected.

  For Bit 5, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the front door is rejected is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the front door is not rejected is indicated.

  As the score-related information (current score-related information) transmitted from the S units to the CU, there are the number of points, the number of additions, the number of subtractions, and external output information.

  The “number of points” is the current number of points (the number of points as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “addition number” is the number of points earned by winning a prize, and if there are a plurality of prizes at the time of transmission, it is a combined value. The CU 3 adds the added number of data to the number of points currently held, but does not add the number of points when receiving this data without holding the card.

  The “subtraction number” is the number of points consumed by setting the number of bets. CU3 subtracts the subtracted data from the number of points currently held, but does not subtract the number of points when this data is received without holding the card. CU3 does not subtract the number of points when the number of points held by CU3 is zero. The external output information is a plurality of types of information as described with reference to FIG.

  The CU that has received the addition number adds this addition number to the number of points it holds. The S units back up the notified value of the addition number as the previous addition number, and clear the current addition number to zero.

  The CU that has received the subtraction number subtracts the received subtraction number from the held number of points. The S units back up the notified value of the subtraction number as the previous subtraction number, and clear the current subtraction number to zero.

  That is, the CU corrects the number of points currently stored (total number of points) using the “addition number” and “subtraction number”. Specifically, the number of score points + the number of additions−the number of subtractions is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new number of score points (total number of score points). Then, it is checked whether or not the total score information transmitted from the S units matches the corrected score number (total score information), and if not, a recovery process is performed for communication. The start request command is transmitted to the S units, and the number of S points is determined based on the data correction request data (bit 2 is “1” data) included in the command and the number of points stored in the CU. A process of correcting (the total number of points information) to the corrected number of points (total number of points information) on the CU side is performed.

  The game table state data for notifying the game table state from the S units to the CU is transmitted. The game table state data includes a game table state 1, a game state 2, a game table error state 1, and a game table error state 2.

  Among these, as the gaming machine error state 2, each bit of Bit0 to Bit3 is prepared, but this is provided as a spare, and is manufacturer-specific error information that is not used for specifying the actual error state. It is for responding to.

  FIG. 17 shows details of each bit of the gaming machine state 1, gaming machine state 2, and gaming machine error state 1 in (Note 2) shown in FIG. Supplementary explanation will be given below.

  Referring to FIG. 17 (a), the game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the gaming machine state 1 indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and is indicated by a command from the CU. The S units that have received the transition to the instructed state. Further, when a communication abnormality occurs, the S cars themselves transition to the game prohibition state.

  During standby / game in Bit1, it is data indicating whether or not the fan (player) is playing (the reel is rotating), and the state where the fan (player) is not playing is waiting. A state in which (player) is playing is playing. The completion of the game of Bit3 indicates whether or not the rotation of all reels in the S units is stopped. A state where at least one of the three reels is rotating is a game not completed (Bit3 = 0), and a state where all the reels are stopped is a game completed (Bit3 = 1). Further, if the rotation of all the reels does not stop even after the specified time has elapsed since the start of the rotation of the reels, the S units time out, notify the abnormality (display or alarm), and transmit that fact to the CU.

  The gaming table reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (S units), and is set to “1” for 30 seconds after the activation of the S units. The presence of game table history information in Bit 5 is data indicating whether or not game table history information such as “start count (start count)” and “big bonus count” is held in S units. No table history information is indicated, and “1” indicates presence of game table history information. When the game machine history information is cleared by clearing RAM, the S machine turns this data OFF. Further, after the RAM is cleared, this data is turned ON at a timing to which data such as “start count (start count)” and “big hit count” is added. In order to match the game machine history data with the S machines, the CU 3 also clears the game machine history data held in the CU 3 when detecting this data OFF.

  FIG. 17B shows details of each bit in the gaming machine state 2 shown in (Note 3) of FIG. A supplementary explanation will be given below.

  As for the big bonus of Bit 0, “1” is set in the big bonus. The regular bonus for Bit 1 is set to “1” during the regular bonus. Bit1 RT is set to “1” during RT.

  FIG. 17C shows details of each bit in the gaming machine error state 1 shown in (Note 3) of FIG. A supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The gaming table error state 1 is composed of 3 bits, Bit0 to Bit2, and details of each bit are shown in Note 4 of FIG. 17 (c). Bit 0 is a bit indicating whether or not the front door is open, and is set to “1” when the front door is open. Bit 1 is a bit indicating whether or not a reel rotation error is occurring, and is set to “1” when a reel rotation error is occurring. Note that the reel rotation error is, for example, an error in which the reference position detection sensor provided on the reel does not detect the rotation reference position of the reel even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of rotation of the reel. Bit 2 is an error indicating whether or not an illegal winning error is occurring, and is set to “1” when an illegal winning error is occurring. The illegal winning error is, for example, an error in which the reel stop appearance and the internal winning flag do not match, or an error in which the reel stop appearance and the added number do not match.

  Bit 0 to Bit 2 are all set to “1” and then returned to “1” by power ON / OFF of the S units.

  The gaming machine error state 2 indicates manufacturer-specific error information, and 4 bits of Bit0 to Bit3 indicate that a gaming machine error 1 is occurring, a gaming machine error 2 is occurring, a gaming machine error 3 is occurring, a gaming machine error 4 occurrences are indicated.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this communication status response is indicated by a hexadecimal string, and 0x00 indicates that the communication status is OK (appropriate). In other cases, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, and 0x10, it is indicated that the abnormality is shown in FIG. In FIG. 18, CRC-NG means that the result of parity check is NG, that is, abnormal. MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted is decrypted and becomes abnormal as a result of not being proper data. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is not normal. The disconnection detection means an abnormality in which the occurrence of a disconnection between the S platform and the CU is detected.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a response of a device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The device information notified from the CU communication control unit to the CU includes a command code, a command size, an acquisition result, a main control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, a payout control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, and a MAC. It is.

  Referring to FIG. 19, a device information response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the CU. The response of the device information response is to transmit information on the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID to the CU. The command code identifies the command code. The data size of the command is specified by the code size. One of OK (with collected information), NG (without collected information), and uncollected is specified by the acquisition result. The main control chip ID is a chip ID recorded on the S main control boards 116, and the payout control chip ID is the S payout chip IDs stored in the payout control unit 31. It is.

  FIGS. 20 to 79 are timing charts showing processing executed by the CPU in the main control unit 323 of the CU, processing executed by the CPU mounted on the LSI 117, and timing charts.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the addition number and the subtraction number from the S units to the CU according to the operation response, changes in the gaming state of the S units (BET operation detection, start operation detection, reel rotation start, reel In response to the rotation stoppage, transition to BB, transition to RB, transition to RT, transition to AT, etc.), corresponding external output information is also transmitted. However, in the following timing chart, illustration of the transmission operation of the external output information as described with reference to FIG. 4 and the storage processing in both the S units and the CU are omitted.

  In addition, in FIG. 20 to FIG. 79 below, addition refusal (score addition refusal), subtraction refusal (score subtraction refusal), permission refusal (game permission refusal), prohibition refusal (game prohibition refusal) included in the operation response For each of refusal clear (number of points and sequence number clear refusal) and front door open refusal, the state where the bit is set (= 1) is described as “ON”, but the bit is not set (= 0) Is described as “OFF”.

  First, with reference to FIG. 20, the mode of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU and the S units will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the S units, and the S units return a response to the CU in response to the command. After receiving the response, the CU transmits the next command to the S units, and the S unit returns a response to the CU in response to the command. As shown in FIG. 20, the period from the transmission of the first command to the S units from the CU to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the S platform to the CU to the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU and S units at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, the S units cannot execute two games while one game regulation time of 4.1 seconds elapses. As a result, in the present embodiment, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received during one game.

  Therefore, the response of the operation response for notifying the amount of change in the number of points is successively transmitted from the S units to the CU at intervals shorter than one game period. As a matter of course, the number of times the betting number is set in one game period is one and the number of winnings that can be generated is one. In other words, there is only one chance each of the points that can be subtracted and added in one game period. Since the response of the motion response is transmitted one after another during this one game period, the S units can finely notify the CU of the amount of change in the number of points. On the other hand, the CU can manage the points by finely reflecting the change of the points on the S platform side.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be set to one game restriction time for S units. It is also possible to match with Alternatively, the transmission interval may be half of one game regulation time or less. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the S platform receives a command from the CU and returns an operation response, but instead, when a BET operation is detected and when a winning occurs, The S units may transmit data notifying the subtraction number or the addition number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a process when a communication disconnection is detected on the CU side will be described. If the response is not received within one second after the CU transmits a command to the S units, the same command is transmitted to the S units again. If no response is received within one second, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to S units. If no response is received from the S units within one second after the second retransmission, the CU determines that there is a communication abnormality at this stage. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector 330 or 220 shown in FIG. 3 is disconnected, or when the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the S units is disconnected.

  The CU transmits a device information request command to the S units in order to start the connection sequence again after 5 seconds after determining the communication abnormality. The specific contents of the processing for transmitting the device information request command to the S units and starting the connection sequence will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the S platform side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the S machine, and the S machine sends a response to the CU in response to the command. Next, if the state in which the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S machines continues for 4 seconds, the S machine determines that the communication has been interrupted, and even if the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 are operated, A game is prohibited as a “betting number operation invalid state (game prohibition state)” that is not set, and a transition is made to an unconnected state. The cause of the occurrence of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the connector 330 or 220, the disconnection of the connection wiring, the power supply disconnection of the CU, etc., as described in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the processing of the connection sequence at the time of power activation will be described. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 23 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the S units is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU is turned off while the card is not inserted (see FIG. 34). A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, at the time of power activation, communication is started after the game is stopped at the S units. In the CU, an authentication sequence process is first executed. The specific control contents of the authentication sequence process are shown in the flowcharts of the subroutine programs shown in FIGS. By this authentication sequence process, a device information request command is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In response, the S unit returns a response of the device information response. The response of this device information response includes a main chip ID and a payout chip ID.

  The CU that has received the device information response stores the information included in the device information response, and requests authentication for the S units that have responded (S units specified by the received main chip ID and payout chip ID). Is sent to S units.

The S units that have received the authentication request return an authentication response to the CU.
Next, specific control contents of the processing of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 24A and 24B are flowcharts showing a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. There are two types of authentication sequences shown in FIG. 23: an authentication sequence when the power source of the CU is activated and an authentication sequence when the power source of the S units (game machines) is activated. The authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated is shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 24A, the main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801 (see FIG. 98). The CU communication control unit 80 performs authentication with the S unit communication control unit 81. Thereafter, communication is started. Then, a CU communication control unit authentication sequence is first executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and then a chip ID authentication sequence is executed.

  FIG. 24B shows an authentication sequence when the power source of the S units (game machines) is activated. Referring to FIG. 24 (b), after communication disconnection with the S units is detected in the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, the CU communication control unit 80 recovers the communication with the S units, Authentication with the stand. Thereafter, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Thereafter, communication with the S units becomes possible.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence shown in FIG. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801. Then, a BB serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. By this BB serial ID authentication sequence, the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 7 is authenticated. Next, the main control unit 323 executes the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence only when the serial ID of the CU communication control unit is acquired from the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit serial ID is authenticated by the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence.

  Next, a writer management information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The writer management information is information related to the ROM writer used when writing the authentication information to the EEPROMs 813 and 808 described with reference to FIG. For example, data such as ROM writer ID, ROM writer manufacturer code, and key version stored in the ROM writer.

  Whether the main control unit 323 collates the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, so that they match. Check whether or not. As a result of the collation check by the writer management information, a certain level of security is ensured and the security is improved even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide.

  Next, a device authentication sequence using an authentication key is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Next, a counter information notification command for requesting transmission of counter information is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. In response, the CU communication control unit transmits a response of a counter information notification response to the main control unit 323 to notify the initial vector of the CTR mode. When using the ECB mode, which is a simple block cipher usage mode, if the same plaintext is encrypted with a certain key, it becomes the same ciphertext. There is an inconvenience that it can be determined by comparing the ciphertext whether or not it is the same as the portion, and in order to solve this, the initial vector of the CTR mode is notified to the CU 323. The encryption mode is set by notification of the counter information. This encryption mode setting is reset every time the power is turned on every day at the game hall, so that security is improved. The ciphertext of communication after the setting of the counter information is further scrambled. For example, if this scramble processing is not performed, the same encrypted data is exchanged every day even if the encryption is performed, and the encryption is easily broken. Such inconvenience can be solved by scrambling.

  Next, the authentication key update sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 only when the main control unit 323 obtains update information from the upper server 801. By this authentication key update sequence, the authentication key can be changed to a new one.

  Next, the main control unit 323 transmits the current time to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 receives the time information, generates a session key (telegram key) from the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 and the received time information, and transmits it to the main control unit 323 as a time response. To do. The session key (message key) can be generated by any method. For example, the received time information and the authentication key are synthesized according to a predetermined algorithm (for example, exclusive OR). The time information generated or received may be encrypted with an authentication key, and the encryption result may be used as a session key (message key). The session key is cleared when the power is turned off and is generated again when the power is turned on next time.

  Next, an authentication sequence similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 29 is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using a session key. Then, when the authentication result is appropriate, encryption communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is performed after encryption and decryption using the session key.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIGS. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the CU communication control unit 80. Then, a payout control authentication result request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This payout control authentication result request command requests the authentication result of the CU communication control unit 80 authenticating the S unit communication control unit 81 provided in the LSI 117 of the S unit 2S. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response of a payout control authentication result response for notifying an authentication result with the S-unit communication control unit 81 of the payout control chip (LSI) to the main control unit 323.

  Next, a device information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This device information request command requests the chip ID of the CU communication control unit. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the chip ID of the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 as a device information response. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 makes an inquiry to the upper server 801 to check the device information (chip ID), and stops communication after NG (inappropriate). If it is not NG, a business message can be transmitted to the S units thereafter. Then, transmission / reception of a recovery request, a recovery response, an operation instruction, and an operation response command response is performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 25, in which challenge-response authentication is performed. Challenge-response authentication is generally an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping of IDs and the like during communication by applying special processing to character strings. For example, the authenticating side performs authentication. A random number sequence (called "challenge code") is sent to the recipient, and the recipient of the challenge code synthesizes the ID etc. and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm, and a response code Generate and reply. On the side that received the response code, generate a response code in the same way from the transmitted challenge code and pre-stored ID, etc., and compare the sent response code with the generated response code to see if they match Authentication is performed to determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, first, a command of BB serial ID request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response requesting a challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication response 1. Upon receipt of the request, the main control unit 323 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 7, and uses the challenge code as a BB serial ID authentication request. It transmits to the communication control part 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 7, and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response 2. To the main control unit 323. In response to this, the main control unit 323 checks the response code to determine whether it is appropriate. When it is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  Any algorithm for generating the challenge code and generating the response code may be used. An example of the algorithm is described below. As a challenge code generation, a random number (binary number) having the same data length is generated for the code data (binary number) of the BB serial ID, and an exclusive OR (exclusive OR) of the BB serial ID and the random number is generated. The calculation result is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as a challenge code. On the other hand, as a response code generation in the CU communication control unit 80, an exclusive OR of a BB serial ID (binary number) is calculated for the received challenge code. If the BB serial ID on the main control unit 323 side matches the BB serial ID on the CU communication control unit 80 side, it means that the exclusive OR of the same BB serial ID has been calculated twice for the random number. The result is the original random number. Then, the original random number is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a response code. The main control unit 323 determines whether or not the generated random number matches the random number sent as a response code. If they match, the main control unit 323 determines that the random number is appropriate, while if not, the main control unit 323 determines that the generated random number is incorrect (NG). judge.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. First, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809 shown in FIG. CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1 is transmitted to main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a response code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. The communication control unit serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 checks the response code A to determine whether it is appropriate. Then, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 including the determination result (check result) and the challenge code B request is transmitted to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 performs control so that subsequent communication is not performed when the check result is inappropriate (NG).

  The algorithm of challenge code generation and response code generation shown in FIG. 28 may be any algorithm, but for example, the algorithm using exclusive OR described in FIG. 27 can be used. .

The challenge-response authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the random number R1 is generated in the CU communication control unit 80, and the challenge code A is generated by encrypting the random number R1 using the SID (referred to as SIDM) of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key. In terms of the equation, the challenge code A = E _SIDM (R1). This is transmitted to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 generates a response code A by decoding with the stored SIDM. In terms of an expression, response code A = D _SIDM (challenge code A) = D _SIDM (E _SIDM (R1)) = R1. This is returned to the communication control unit 80, and it is checked whether or not the random number R1 previously generated in the communication control unit 80 matches the returned response code A (= R1). It is determined that the authentication is successful.

Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2 and encrypts the random number R2 using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the main control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key to generate a challenge code B. In terms of the equation, challenge code B = E _SIDT (R2). This is transmitted to the communication control unit 80, and decrypted with the SIDT stored in the communication control unit 80 to generate the response code B. _{Expressed by the} equation, response code B = D _SIDT (challenge code B) = D _SIDT (E _SIDT (R2)) = R2. This is returned to the main control unit 323, and the random number R2 previously generated in the main control unit 323 is compared with the returned response code B (= R2) to check whether they match. It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. This device authentication sequence is an encryption / decryption authentication sequence using an encryption key (authentication key), and an ECB mode is used as a block encryption mode. First, the main control unit 323 transmits a device authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number A and encrypts the random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Also create a MAC. This MAC is a Message Authentication Code. For example, a value obtained by calculating the generated random number A using a predetermined hash function is defined as MAC. That is, the message digest of the generated random number A becomes the MAC. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the encrypted random number A and MAC as the device authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  Upon receipt of the request, the main control unit 323 decrypts the received encrypted random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 7, and generates the original plaintext random number A. The MAC is calculated using the hash function. Then, it is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the MAC transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG).

  Next, the main control unit 323 generates a random number B, and encrypts the random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. Further, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to create a MAC. Then, the encrypted random number B and MAC are further transmitted as an apparatus authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 80 as an authentication result based on the apparatus authentication response 1. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the encrypted random number B received using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Then, the MAC is calculated by calculating the random number B using a predetermined hash function. It is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the received MAC. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG). Then, the determination result is transmitted as a device authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323. When the determination result is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. When there is an authentication key update request from the upper server 801, the main control unit 323 transmits the authentication key update request to the CU communication control unit 80. The update request from the higher-level server 801 includes new authentication key data. The main control unit 323 updates the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 7 to a new authentication key transmitted from the higher-level server 801 and sends an authentication key update request transmitted from the higher-level server 801. Transmit to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 performs processing to update the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 7 to the new authentication key that has been transmitted, and uses the result as an authentication key update response. To H.323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit executes a device authentication sequence with the communication control unit 80 using the newly updated authentication key. This device authentication sequence is the same authentication sequence as the control shown in FIG. If the authentication result is appropriate, communication is performed using the authentication key thereafter.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the storage setting of the authentication key in the EEPROM 808. The authentication key is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the authentication key is stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323. .

  Referring to FIG. 31, this authentication key setting sequence is an authentication key writing sequence at the time of card unit (CU) manufacture. First, the main control unit 323 waits for transmission of authentication key information from the CU communication control unit 80 on condition that an authentication key with the CU communication control unit 80 is not written. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication in response to a request from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the BB serial ID, that is, the SID authentication request A of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 7 to the main control unit 323. Receiving it, the main control unit 323 transmits a BB serial ID authentication response A for requesting a challenge code to the CU communication control unit 80 to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 7 and uses the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request B. Transmit to the main control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 7, and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response B. Transmit to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the response code is appropriate, and transmits the authentication key information shown below only when it is appropriate (OK). The challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 35 can also use the same algorithm (for example, exclusive OR) as the challenge response authentication shown in FIGS.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 determines that the authentication result is appropriate, the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer), that is, the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Information is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as an authentication key setting request. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 stores the transmitted authentication key in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 7 and transmits an authentication key setting response indicating that the authentication key has been stored to the CU communication control unit 80.

  As a result, a common authentication key (common key) is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 then performs device authentication using the common authentication key. This device authentication is the same as the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. If it is determined that the device authentication is appropriate, the subsequent communication is not performed, and a reset wait state is entered.

  Next, returning to FIG. 23, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to the S units. In response to this, the S units return the recovery data backed up inside the S units (specifically, the payout control unit 31) to the CU as a response. This recovery data includes connection time, final SQN (sequence number), C-ID, previous point-related information, and current point-related information. To be precise, the various data shown in FIG. 11, and “recovery data” in the following flowcharts are exactly the various data shown in FIG. 11. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is the SQN transmitted last by S units as described above.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU and the S units, and is not only executed when the power is turned on, but also recovered as a result of a trouble as described later. Sometimes even executed.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time an “operation instruction” is transmitted. However, it is not counted up when the operation instruction is retransmitted. The CU backs up the SQN and its request contents when transmitting an “operation request”. The S units store the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and send it back to the CU as it is by “operation response”. When the S unit receives an operation instruction of the same SQN as the previously received SQN, the S unit determines that the re-transmission text is that the communication failure has occurred and the CU has retransmitted the operation instruction.

  After the recovery process is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from the S units, updates the SQN to “0”, and sends a communication start request (recovery clear ON). As commands, a command of SQN correction ON, holding point correction ON, SQN = 0, holding point = 0 is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, the “S” number matches the “sequence number” and “scoring point” backed up on the S unit to the CU information (SQN = 0, scoring point = 0). Also, the notified “connection time” is backed up. Then, the S units return a communication start response to the CU. Thereafter, an operation instruction command and an operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S platform.

  As described above, the CU counts up the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request, SQN = 0, C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, the S units back up the data of SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, pre-addition number = 0, pre-subtraction number = 0. Further, the S units clears the value of each counter of the addition number and the subtraction number, which is the current point-related information, to zero. Then, the S units send SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of points = 0, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, and the game prohibition (game stop state) response to the CU as operation responses. .

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 based on the operation response, calculates the current score 0 + the received addition number 0−the received subtraction number 0, and backs up the current score 0. At the same time, addition number accumulation = 0 and subtraction number accumulation = 0 are backed up.

  Next, at the stage where the start-up process is completed on the CU side, the CU sends a game permission request presence, SQN = n, C-ID = 00h operation instruction to the S units, As a result, a game permission / rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of points = 0, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, and a game permission response are returned to the CU.

  When an appropriate authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key of FIG. 25, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 32 is executed. FIG. 32A shows a case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 32B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 32A, after an operation instruction command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, a request for confirming the communication state of the operation instruction message (communication state request). Is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the reception status of the operation instruction message (MAC error, CRC error, decoding error, data length error, disconnection detection) as a communication status response (see FIG. 18).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication state based on the received communication state response, and determines that it is normal when normal.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the operation instruction command to the P units (specifically, the P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the operation instruction command. In response to this, the P platform returns an operation response to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives it and transmits a response to the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, FIG. 32B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal. The difference from FIG. 32A is that the main control unit 323 that has received the communication status response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 checks the communication status based on the communication status response and determines that it is abnormal. It is a point to do. This is determined to be abnormal when the transmitted communication status response is numeric data other than 0x00 shown in FIG. If the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes a retry of checking the communication state. Specifically, after an operation instruction command is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, a communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response returned from the CU communication control unit 80. To determine whether a communication status error has occurred. If the main control unit 323 determines that the communication state is still abnormal as a result of executing the retry, the communication state abnormality notification control is performed. As the communication state abnormality notification control, for example, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 797 to notify the communication state abnormality by the display 312 or the abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked. Or a signal indicating that a communication state abnormality has occurred may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1. The number of retry executions is one in FIG. 32B, but may be executed twice or more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the processing of the connection sequence when the CU and the S unit are reconnected will be described. Here, “at the time of reconnection” refers to the time when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the S unit ends abnormally. This “abnormal termination” is described later, when the power is activated while holding the card in FIG. 45, or when the CU disconnects communication when the S units in FIG. 52 refuse to add, the CU side in FIGS. This is a case where power is cut off. As will be described later, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, a. The connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 34), b. It is determined whether the connection sequence is restarted later (see FIG. 52), or whether the SQN backed up by c.CU is inconsistent with the SQN transmitted from the S units. When it is determined that either one of c is present, it is determined that normal communication is not completed (abnormal termination), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection shown in FIG. 33 is executed instead of FIG.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described with reference to FIG. 23, and here, differences will be mainly described.

  First, the time when the S cars are prohibited from gaming in the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) and the communication is started immediately after receiving the device information request command from the CU. This is because the S units can recognize that the S units have been reconnected only after receiving a device information request from the CU.

  Next, since the connection sequence of FIG. 23 is when the power is turned on, a command for requesting the start of recovery clear ON is transmitted from the CU to the S units, and the S unit receives it and clears the recovery data. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 in accordance with SQN = 1 sent by the first operation instruction, and all the previous holding point related information and the current holding point related information are cleared to “0”.

  However, in the case of the connection sequence of FIG. 33, since it is at the time of reconnection, there is a case where the recovery information backed up inside the S units does not match the information stored on the CU side. Therefore, after starting the recovery process, the CU corrects the score etc. in accordance with the content of the recovery data on the S side (the previous score related information, the current score related information, etc.) included in the recovery response. The process which performs is performed.

  Specifically, based on the addition number and subtraction number included in the recovery data sent from the S units, the number of points stored by the CU + the addition number−the subtraction number is calculated and stored. A process of correcting the score to the calculated new score is performed, and the corrected score is compared with the score transmitted as recovery data from the S units to determine whether or not they match. .

  If they do not match, a command with the point correction ON, that is, Bit 2 of the data correction request set to “1” is transmitted to the S units as a communication start request. Further, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from the S units is compared with the final SQN stored in the CU to determine whether or not they match. SQN correction ON, that is, a command for setting Bit 1 of the data correction request to “1” is transmitted to the S units. The correct number of points to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the S units.

  The S unit receives the communication start request command, and performs a correction process to match the “sequence number” and “score” backed up on the S unit with the information of the CU. Specifically, a process of correcting SQN = 3 and score = 300 and backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  Then, at the stage where the recovery process is completed, the CU backs up the main chip ID and the payout chip ID transmitted from the S units and backs up the connection time that is the time of reconnection. For the sequence number, when the final SQN transmitted from the S units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, after the recovery process is started in the CU, if it is determined that the S counterparts as communication partners do not match or if the SQN is determined to be abnormal, the recovery response transmitted from the S counterpart Is temporarily recorded in a game recording medium (card or the like) owned by the player. After that, the replay button 319 is operated so as to use the stored medal of the recording medium, and the remedy is made possible after converting the stored medal into a score. At that time, similarly to the connection sequence at the time of power activation shown in FIG. 23, recovery clear ON is transmitted as a communication start request transmitted from the CU to the S units, and the S units receive the recovery data in response to the request. clear. In the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the S units in the first operation instruction, and the SQN = 1 is backed up in the S units. In the S units, the previous addition number = 0 and the previous subtraction number = 0 are backed up, and the counter values of the addition number and the subtraction number are cleared to zero.

  Next, processing during standby will be described with reference to FIG. The waiting state means that no game is played in the S units, no card is inserted in the CU, and the lending button 321 and the replay button 319 are not operated at all.

  First, an operation instruction command of no addition request, no subtraction request, SQN = n, and C-ID = 00h is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In response to this, the S units transmit SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of points = 0, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, and the game prohibition data as the response of the operation response. In the CU, SQN = n + 2, the number of addition requests = 0, and the number of subtraction requests = 0 are backed up. In the next operation instruction command from the CU to the S units, data of SQN = n + 2 and C-ID = 00h is transmitted. In response to this, S units back up SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, pre-addition number = 0, pre-subtraction number = 0, and clear each counter value of addition number, subtraction number, and number of points to 0 To do.

  Then, the S units transmit SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, the number of points = 0, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, and the game prohibition response as CU responses. The CU backs up C-ID = 00h, the number of points = 0, the cumulative total = 0, and the subtractive cumulative = 0 every time a response of the operation response from the S units is received.

With reference to FIG. 35, the processing of the CU and S units when a card is inserted will be described.
When a card is inserted, the CU outputs a command signal for taking the card to the card reader / writer 327, and the card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the taken card and receives the read information. For example, the card insertion process is executed.

  In this insertion processing, a card insertion request command is transmitted to the S units, in which the CU reads the C-ID recorded on the inserted card and transmits the C-ID to the S units. In response to this, the S unit returns a response of the card insertion response notifying the CU that the reception of the C-ID is completed to the CU. Further, as this insertion processing, control as shown in FIG. 40 described later is executed.

  The CU is in a card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the process of inquiring, for example, an upper server such as the hall management computer 1 about the suitability of the inserted card, whether it is a member card registered at the game hall, or the prepaid balance. This means that the display unit 312 and the display unit 51 on the S side are in the process of executing the process. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 and the like, the CU displays that the card inserted into the display unit 312 is being inquired, and issues an operation instruction including ON during card holding, C-ID, and ON during card insertion processing. Send to S units.

  In the S unit, by receiving the operation instruction command, the LSI 117 transmits display control commands including ON during card holding and ON during card insertion processing to the display effect control board 90, and inquires about the inserted card. The display effect control board 90 performs control to display on the display 51 to the effect (see FIG. 76).

  After that, the S units transmit a response including SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of score points = 0, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, and the game prohibition as an operation response.

  In the CU, the balance and the score are confirmed when the balance and the score of the inserted card can be confirmed as a result of the inquiry of the card balance. The CU performs control to display the prepaid balance of the confirmed card on the display 312, and performs addition display during transmission to the gaming machine (S units) with the confirmed score (5000) as a score. The display inside is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 76).

  Then, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, score = 0 (number of score before update) +5000 (number of addition requests) = 5000 and score = 0 are backed up. At this point, the consumption of points is confirmed.

  Next, as an operation instruction, a command including addition request present, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, addition request count = 5000 and card balance = 7000 Send to the stand. As described with reference to FIG. 13, the operation instructions during the card holding process and the card insertion process are divided into the membership card and the visitor card, and the operation instruction is transmitted for each type of the card. The operation may be displayed separately for each type of card.

  In the S unit, when the LSI 117 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the number of addition requests = 5000, the display unit control command including ON during addition display and the number of addition requests = 5000 is displayed from the LSI 117. Transmit to the dexterous effect control board 90. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 displays on the display 51 that 5000 points are being added as a score (during addition display) (see FIG. 76).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program for the insertion time process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 36, each step of S1 to S7 is executed by the CU, and S8 to S10 and S12 to S15 are executed by the S units.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not the interrupting operation shown in FIG. If it is suspended, it is determined in S2 whether or not the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the suspended card. If not, the inserted card is inserted in S5. The card is ejected and the process proceeds to standby (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, if the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the card that has been suspended, it is determined that the suspended player has returned to the gaming machine and started the game. Therefore, the control advances to S4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game is executed in S6.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, a process of transmitting the C-ID of the inserted card to the S units is performed in S3. The S unit receives the C-ID, and compares the received C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit shown in FIG. 5) (S8). Then, in S9, it is determined whether or not the comparison results match. If they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing ends. .

  In addition, you may perform the process of S15 and S7 as control content of a modification. Through S15, the game history data and the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU and then deleted. The CU receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801. The host server 801 stores the received game history data and C-ID as a backup.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that they match in S9, the process proceeds to S12, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (player game history data storage unit shown in FIG. 5). The game history data is newly added and updated.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S10, S13, and S14 as a control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data and the C-ID of the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted, a process is performed in S13. Further, after S12, in S15, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of S10, S13, S14 and the processes of S15, S7.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, processing when the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted recording medium (card) is consumed will be described. In the process of FIG. 37, the prepaid balance is “1000” and the current score is “10”. First, a command with no addition request, OFF during addition display, SQN = n, C-ID, number of addition requests = 0, and number of subtraction requests = 0 is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In response to this, the S units return SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of points = 10, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, and a response indicating that the game is possible.

  On the other hand, CU lends for 500 yen, that is, 25 points by one lending operation. When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pushed down in the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, the number of score points = 10 (the number of score points before update) +25 (the number of addition requests) = 35 and the balance = 500 are backed up. . In this way, the balance consumption is determined by the CU alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed.

  Then, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands of addition request present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of addition requests = 25, and card balance = 500 to the S units. In response to this, the LSI 117 transmits a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of addition requests 25 included in the operation instruction command to the display effect control board 90. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 causes the display 51 to display a screen on which 25 points are being added.

  Next, S units back up SQN = n + 2, C-ID, pre-addition number = 0, pre-subtraction number = 0, and create a response, and then clear each counter value of addition number and subtraction number to 0 Then, the number of points is updated to a value of 35 obtained by adding the number of addition requests 25 to the current number of points 10.

  Then, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, score = 35, addition number = 0, subtraction number = 0, a response indicating that the game is possible is returned.

  Upon receiving this, the CU calculates and backs up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of points = 10 (number of points before update) +25 (number of addition requests) +0 (number of additions) −0 (number of subtractions) = 35 At the same time, addition accumulation = 0 and subtraction accumulation = 0 are backed up.

  Eventually, when the point addition display on the CU side is completed, as shown in FIG. 69, an operation instruction command including OFF during addition display is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the process at the time of replay which consumes a medal will be described. In FIG. 38, the stored medal specified by the inserted recording medium (card or the like) is “1000”, and the initial score is “0”. The replay process in FIG. 38 is similar to the process at the time of consumption of the balance shown in FIG.

  On the CU side, when a player's own game recording medium (member card or the like) is inserted and there is a stored medal specified by the card, the SQN = Back up n + 2, C-ID, number of points = 0 (number of points before update) +25 (number of addition requests) = 25, number of addition requests = 25, number of subtraction requests = 0, saving medals = 975. The stored medal is calculated as 1000-25 = 975.

  Then, the CU transmits to the S units a command including an addition request present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, the number of addition requests = 25, and the number of subtraction requests = 0. In response to this, the LSI 117 transmits a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of addition requests 25 included in the operation instruction command to the display effect control board 90. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 causes the display 51 to display a screen on which 25 points are being added.

  Other processing is the same as the processing in FIG. As described above, the consumption of stored medals is determined by the CU alone when the re-play button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the S units, and the score is from the S units. Wait for the response of the operation response of and confirm.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the processing of subtracting the number of points (wagon service etc.) according to the instruction on the CU side will be described. In the amusement hall, a wagon service is provided in which the player's own points are consumed and drinks are provided to the player. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display unit 312 (see FIGS. 87 to 91), and by placing a wagon order, the order content ordered by the player is a card unit. 3 IR photosensitive unit 320 is input as an infrared signal to a remote control possessed by a shop clerk.

  The amusement hall clerk performs a wagon service according to the contents of the order entered on the remote control. FIG. 39 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes “300” used points is generated in a state where the player has “1000” points. When a wagon order is generated, the CU performs a process of backing up “300”, which is the number of points used when the wagon order is generated, as SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request number = 0, and subtraction request number. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the score, but simply backs up “300” as the number of subtraction requests. Then, a command of subtraction request present, subtraction display ON, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request number = 0 and subtraction request number = 300 is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the S units.

  Receiving this, the S units determine whether or not the value of the score counter stored therein is equal to or greater than the subtraction request number. This determination is executed by the LSI 117. In FIG. 39, it is assumed that the value of the score counter is greater than or equal to the number of subtraction requests. In the S unit, when the LSI 117 receives an operation instruction command including ON during subtraction display and the number of subtraction requests = 300, a display unit control command including ON during subtraction display and the number of subtraction requests = 300 is displayed from the LSI 117. Transmit to the dexterous effect control board 90. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 displays on the display 51 that 300 is being subtracted as a score (during subtraction display).

  Next, the S units back up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, pre-addition number = 0, pre-subtraction number = 0, and clear the values of the counters of the addition number and the subtraction number to zero. Then, according to the number of subtraction requests = 300, the score is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the subtraction number 300 from the current score 1000.

  Then, the subtraction rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of current points = 700, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, and a game ready response are returned as operation responses from the S units to the CU.

  The CU calculates SQN = n + 3, C-ID, score number = 1000 (number of score points before update) −300 (number of subtraction requests) +0 (number of additions) −0 (number of subtractions) = 700, and calculates the number of score points. Modify it to “700” and back it up with SQN = n + 3. Thus, the subtraction of the number of points is determined only after waiting for the response of the operation response from the S units.

Further, the CU backs up C-ID, addition accumulation = 0, and subtraction accumulation = 0.
On the other hand, when the S units determine that the value of the score counter stored therein is less than the number of subtraction requests, the S units do not perform subtraction of the number of points according to the number of subtraction requests. In this case, the S platform returns an operation response indicating that the subtraction rejection is ON to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the CU is notified that the points have not been subtracted based on the subtraction request because the S units refused the subtraction request.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 39, the subtraction of the number of points based on the instruction from the CU is determined only after waiting for the response of the operation response from the S units. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 38, the medal saving based on the instruction from the CU is fixed when the CU accepts the medal saving.

  As described above, the determination time is different between “subtraction of the number of points based on the CU instruction” and “consumption of stored medals based on the CU instruction” for the following reason.

  The result that the score was used in the game at the stage when the S units received the subtraction instruction, although the subtraction instruction was sent because there was a margin in the number of points at the stage when the CU accepted the subtraction process for the number of points such as a wagon order. In some cases, the number of points corresponding to the subtraction instruction does not remain.

  In such a case, if subtraction is confirmed based on the number of points stored in the CU at the stage when the CU accepts the subtraction process, the number of points actually remains on the gaming machine side. First, the subtraction is finalized, resulting in a contradiction. Therefore, in this embodiment, “subtraction of the number of points based on the instruction of the CU” is determined after waiting for a response of the operation response from the S units.

  On the other hand, with regard to “consumption of stored medals based on CU instructions”, even if the number of points stored in the S units fluctuates when the instruction reaches the S units, There is no problem in adding points. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the process, “save medal consumption based on CU instruction” is determined when the CU accepts the medal consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, processing when a big bonus occurs during a game will be described. FIG. 40 shows a state in which a big bonus has occurred while the initial number of points is 1000 and an operation instruction and an operation response are being transmitted and received between the S units and the CU in the game. ing.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n and C-ID are backed up, and a command of no addition request, no subtraction request, SQN = n, and C-ID is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the S units. In response to the S units, a 3BET game has started. As a result, in the S units, SQN = n + 1, pre-addition number = 0, pre-subtraction number = 3, backup points = 1000 + 0 (addition number) −3 (subtraction number) = 997, Is updated to 997. Further, after the response is created, each counter value of the addition number and the subtraction number is cleared to zero.

  Then, S units send SQN = n + 1, the number of score points = 997, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 3, the game is possible, and the big bonus OFF response to the CU as an operation response. Thus, the S units transmit not only the subtraction number and the addition number but also the number of points to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether or not the number of points stored in the S units matches the number of points managed by the CU.

  The CU that has received the response of the operation response calculates the number of points = 1000 + 0-3 = 997 and backs up the number 997 as the number of points, and backs up the accumulated number of additions = 0 and the accumulated number of subtractions = 3.

  While the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command and the operation response response is repeatedly executed, a big bonus is generated in the S units, and the score-related information includes the score = 1012, the addition number = 15, and the subtraction. Number = 0. Then, a big bonus win is generated at the S units and the big bonus starts. With the big bonus winning, for example, 15 points are awarded to the player. Then, S units back up SQN = n + N + 1, the number of previous additions = 15, the number of previous subtractions = 0, and calculate the number of points = 997 + 15 (the number of additions) −3 (the number of subtractions) = 1012, Update to 1012. Further, after the response is created, each counter value of the addition number and the subtraction number is cleared to zero. Further, the S units transmit SQN = n + N + 1, the number of points = 1012, the number of additions = 15, the number of subtractions = 0, the game is possible, and the big bonus ON response to the CU as an operation response.

  In response to this, the CU detects that a big bonus has been won and the big bonus has started. Further, the CU calculates SQN = n + N + 1, the number of holding points = 997 + 15 (the number of additions) −3 (the number of subtractions) = 1012, corrects the number of points to 1012 and backs up, and the cumulative number of additions = 15, the number of subtractions Back up cumulative total = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a process in the case where it is detected that there are no more points while playing with S cars will be described. The initial number of points = 6 is set. First, the CU backs up SQN = n, C-ID, the number of addition requests = 0, and the number of subtraction requests = 0, and as an operation instruction, no addition request, no subtraction request, and SQN = N command is transmitted to S units. In the S units, for example, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-addition number = 0, pre-subtraction number = 3 is backed up based on the setting of the betting number 3. After creating the response, the counter values of the addition number and subtraction number are cleared to zero.

  Then, the S units transmit SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of score points = 3, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 3, and a game-enabled response to the CU as operation responses. In the CU, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, and the number of score points = 6 + 0−3 = 3 are calculated and then the number of score points is corrected and backed up, and the addition total = 0 and the subtraction total = 3 are backed up.

Thereafter, the exchange of commands and responses continues for a while.
Thereafter, when a game in which the bet number 3 is further set is started on the S units, the subtraction number = 3. As a result, the number of score points = 3-3 = 0. At the stage where the number of points is 0, no points are detected in the S units. That is, the LSI 117 determines that the remaining score is less than or equal to the number required for setting the betting number based on the value of the score counter stored by itself. At this stage, the LSI 117 controls the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) to prohibit the start of a new game. Specifically, a BET impossible signal for notifying prohibition of setting of the betting amount is transmitted from the LSI 117 to the main control board 116. In response to this, the main control board 116 invalidates the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6. Note that if the game is being executed when no point is detected, that is, if the variable display device is variably displayed, the S units continue the variable display game and prohibit the start of the next game.

  The CU backs up SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of addition requests = 0, and the number of subtraction requests = 0, and uses commands of no addition request, no subtraction request, C-ID, and SQN = n + N as operation instructions. Send to S units.

  In the S unit, C-ID and SQN = n + N + 1 are backed up, and the number of additions and the number of subtractions are each created after backing up the number of previous additions = 0 and the number of previous subtractions = 3, and creating a response including the number of subtractions = 3. The counter value is cleared to zero.

  Then, the S units transmit SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, the number of points = 0, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 3, and the game prohibition operation response to the CU as operation responses. This motion response is “update information that can identify the amount of change identified between the time when the first motion response is transmitted and the bet number operation invalid state”.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of points = 3 + 0-3 = 0, corrects the number of points to 0, and backs up the SQN = n + N + 1, backs up the C-ID, and further adds up to 0, subtracts The total is corrected to 6.

  In this way, the main management of the number of points is performed by the CU, but the number of points on the S side is used only when determining whether or not to perform the game prohibition control (betting number setting prohibition control). Thereby, compared with the case where the game prohibition control is performed based on the number of points managed and stored in the CU, the game prohibition control in accordance with the fluctuation of the score can be performed in real time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, processing when a card return operation is performed will be described. When the return button 322 is pressed down at the stage when an operation instruction is sent from the CU to the S unit in response to an operation instruction from the CU to the CU in response to the initial number of points = 500, As a next operation instruction, a command of prohibition for prohibiting a game, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = n + 2, C-ID command is transmitted to the S units. In the S units, the bet number operation disabled state (game prohibition state) in which the bet number cannot be set is controlled according to the prohibition request presence instruction included in the command. Thereafter, a weight corresponding to a predetermined time equal to or longer than one game regulation time (for example, 4.1 seconds) is provided. The predetermined time is, for example, 10 seconds. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. By providing the wait time in this manner, the game result is fixed when the game has already started at the stage of receiving the prohibition request command from the CU (when the variable display device is variably displayed). This prevents the card from being returned before.

  During this polling, a sequence is used in which data indicating that preparation is in progress is repeatedly transmitted from the S units to the CU, while a prohibition request is repeatedly transmitted from the CU to the S units. May be.

  Alternatively, during this polling, data indicating that preparation is in progress is sent once from the S unit to the CU, while the CU has agreed to be in preparation to the S unit. A sequence may be adopted in which the indicated data is transmitted once, and thereafter, an operation instruction not including any instruction is repeatedly transmitted from the CU until the game ends.

  Alternatively, during this polling, a sequence may be adopted in which data indicating prohibition rejection is transmitted from the S units to the CU, while a prohibition request is repeatedly transmitted from the CU to the S units.

  At the stage when the wait time has elapsed, the S units respond with SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, the number of points = 500, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, the game prohibition, and the game completion ON as the operation response. Send to CU. The number of points transmitted at this time is the final number of points at the end of the game. This sequence example shows a case where no winning occurs during the wait time, and neither the addition number nor the subtraction number changes. If a winning occurs during the wait time, the number of points corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the CU as an “addition number”.

  Upon receiving this operation response, the CU backs up SQN = n + N + 2 and data with a clear request. Further, the stored data of “number of points, total number of additions, total number of subtractions” is updated according to “number of additions, number of subtractions” included in the operation response. As a result, the score at the end of the game is determined on the CU side. Thus, since the final number of points is determined on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the S platform side, and the cost of the S platform can be reduced as much as possible.

  The CU that backed up SQN = n + N + 2 and data with a clear request then sends a command of clear request, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 2, and C-ID to the S units as operation instructions. . Thereafter, the CU displays on the display 312 a message indicating that the CU is being cleared (see FIG. 96 and FIG. 97). This “clear request is present” is data instructing the initialization of the number of S points.

  In the S unit, the LSI 117 transmits a display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the display effect control board 90. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 displays a display screen that is being cleared (screen that is being cleared) on the display 51.

  In this example, the CU receives the input of a “signal for requesting completion of the game” based on the operation of the return button 322, and determines the number of points at the end of the game. However, the “signal for requesting the end of the game” is not limited to a signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates a player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and the fingerprint information specified by the game card inserted into the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. The game is allowed as a condition. Furthermore, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential at the end of the game, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal for requesting game end” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

Alternatively, a button corresponding to the return button 322 may be provided on the S platform side.
In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request signal” is constituted by the game end request signal input from the server.

  Returning to the description of FIG. With clear request present, clear display, S units that have received the command of SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID shift and store the game history data and C-ID that are currently updated and stored in the storage area in the backup area .

  Next, as the operation response, the S unit clears clear rejection not to reject the clear request, SQN = 0, C-ID, the number of points = 0, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, the game is prohibited, and the game is completed Send ON response to CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, holding point = 0, and card recording holding point = 500. The card recording score = 500 is a value based on the score score received immediately before the clear request.

  Thereafter, the CU records the score = 500 on the inserted card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, as an operation instruction, a command including no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = m, and C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the S units. After that, the S unit responds with SQN = m + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of points = 0, number of additions = 0, number of subtractions = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF as operation responses. Send to CU. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of points stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the stored points are stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. The search is performed and the score is updated to a value corresponding to the score stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card. In this way, both the recording of the card score directly on the card and the storing of the score in association with the card number in the host server are collectively referred to as “associating” the score with the card. To do.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the game is interrupted.

  42 is similar to the processing of the card unit and the slot machine when returning the card in FIG. 42, and the difference is that an interruption operation is performed instead of pressing the return button. This interruption operation is an operation for the player to temporarily suspend the game so that the player can finish the use, and the player calls a store clerk at the game hall and asks the store clerk to perform a remote control operation to interrupt the game. Then, the IR signal output from the remote controller is received by the IR light receiving unit 315, converted into an electronic signal, and input to the main control unit 323. In response to the prohibition request from the CU, the S platform prohibits the BET operation so that the game cannot be played. When a prohibition request is received while the reel is rotating, a wait time (for example, 10 seconds) is provided until the end of the game in the same way as described above. Game completion OFF is returned.

  In the case of this game interruption process, even if the CU detects the completion of the game, the clear request is not transmitted to the S units. As a result, in the S units, data (C-ID, score points, etc.) relating to the interrupted player is stored and held. Then, when the CU discharges the card, the card with 0 points is discharged and returned to the player. Thereafter, other players' games are prohibited during the interruption (see FIG. 36).

  With reference to FIG. 44, the process when the front door 2b is unlocked and opened will be described. First, as the first operation instruction, a command including an instruction for no front door opening request without a front door opening request is transmitted from the CU to the S units. Receiving it, the S platform returns a normal response including the score = 500 to the CU as an operation response.

  At this stage, for example, when a player calls an attendant at the game hall, for example, when a start operation is performed on the S units and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start to rotate and a display trouble occurs on the display 51. In addition, the attendant at the game hall operates the remote controller that he / she owns to transmit an infrared signal to the IR photosensitive unit 320 for unlocking and opening the front door 2b.

  In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 inputs a front door opening instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main control unit 323. Upon receiving the front door opening instruction input, the CU sends a command of prohibition request, front door opening request, and SQN = n + 2 to the S units to prohibit the game and open the front door as an operation instruction. To do.

  In response to this, the S units first control to a bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) in which a bet number cannot be set. As a result, the BET operation is prohibited. However, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may already be rotating at that time, and the progress of the game itself is not stopped during such a game. In addition, the S platform prohibits the BET operation when receiving the above command, but does not immediately unlock the front door.

  For example, FIG. 44 shows a case where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating at the stage of being controlled to the betting number operation invalid state (game prohibition state).

  Next, the S platform provides a wait time (for example, 10 seconds) of 4.1 seconds or more corresponding to one game regulation time. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. By providing the wait time in this way, the game result is confirmed when the game has already started at the stage when the command with the prohibition request is received from the CU (when the variable display device is being variably displayed). The front door 2b is prevented from being opened before the operation.

  Until the wait time elapses, the S units return, as a response, an operation response of prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU. On the other hand, the CU continues to transmit a command with a prohibition request and a front door opening request.

  Eventually, the result of the game that has already progressed at the stage of being controlled to the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) is determined. For example, it is assumed here that 10 points have been won. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, even in the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state), if there is a situation where points must be added during that time, the number of additions (here, from S units to the CU) Then, an operation response including the addition number = 10) is transmitted. That is, the S units specify the amount of change even when the score changes while the game is prohibited, and transmit the amount of change to the CU. As a result, on the CU side, it is possible to manage the points including the amount of change in points until the game result is determined after the game is prohibited.

  When the wait time elapses, the S platform (LSI 117) excites the front door opening solenoid 110 to unlock the front door 2b and open the front door 2b. Further, the processing of turning on the bit 6 of Bit 6 during development of the front door in the gaming table state shown in FIG. 15, that is, “1”, is performed until the front door 2 b is closed (the detection signal from the front door closing detector 112). Until it is input). Then, the S platform returns a response including the response during the front door opening rejection OFF, the C-ID, the game prohibition, and the front door development student as an operation response to the CU.

  In the CU, if the front door opening request command is not rejected, that is, if a response including a front door opening rejection OFF response is returned, it is determined that the front door 2b has been opened.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 44, according to the present embodiment, the command from the CU side without affecting the game progress regarding the closed state of the front door 2b, which is a specific example of the front members of the S units. It can be released by.

  The S LSIs 117 determine whether or not any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotating when receiving a front door opening request command from the CU, If any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotating, after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, or all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, You may make it cancel | release the obstruction | occlusion state of the front door 2b after the calculation time of a point addition number passes.

  In this case, the S units are information for instructing the lock means to release the lock during the game in which the symbols are variably displayed on the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) When the command is received, the control for releasing the lock by the lock means is delayed until the game is over and the game is prohibited.

  Alternatively, the S LSIs 117 determine whether a front door opening request is received from the CU, and determine whether or not the game is in progress. If the game is in progress, the S LSI 117 does not open the front door to the CU. On the other hand, a response indicating that the front door opening rejection is ON may be returned. That is, the S platform may accept a front door opening request only when the game is not being played when a command with a front door opening request is received from the CU.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, processing when the CU is powered on while holding a card and an abnormality in which the S units are not connected at that time occurs will be described. Since a communication interruption occurred between the CU and the S units while the card was inserted and a game was being played on the S units, a recovery request command was issued from the CU when the CU power was restarted. Sent to. However, since an unconnected abnormality of the S units has occurred, a response from the S units is not returned to the CU.

  Then, as described in FIG. 21, the CU retransmits the recovery request command to the S units. Nevertheless, if no response from the S units is returned, the second recovery request is retransmitted to the S units. If no response is returned from the S units for the second retransmission, at this stage, the CU determines that there is a communication error and displays on the display 312 that an error has occurred due to no connection. Execute the control. A device information request command may be transmitted instead of the recovery request.

  In this state, when the store clerk operates the remote controller for the CU and outputs an infrared signal forcibly ejecting the inserted card to the IR photosensitive unit 320, the forced ejection signal is sent to the main control unit 323. Entered. Upon receiving this, the CU adds the “number of points” backed up by the CU to the “points (stored medal)” of the inserted card, and clears the “number of points” and “connection time” of the CU to 0. Then, a command to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer 327. Receiving it, the card reader / writer 327 discharges the taken card.

  Instead of recording the score directly on the card, the score may be stored in association with the card number of the card at the higher-level server. In that case, the number of points stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the stored points are stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. The search is performed and the score is updated to a value corresponding to the score stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a recovery request command to the S units, and performs a resumption process of the connection sequence (see FIG. 33). The CU determines that the connection sequence is resumed in a state in which a card is inserted (a state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 33 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power-on in FIG. To do. The number of additions (for example, j) or the number of subtractions (for example, between the occurrence of S connection failure and the time when the connection sequence (see FIG. 33) is restarted until the first operation response is transmitted by the S units. For example, the process when r) occurs is performed in the restart process of FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 33, the CU receives the recovery response from the S units, calculates the score = 0 + j (addition) + r (subtraction), and backs up the score = j + r as the calculation result. To do. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 33, SQN correction ON, holding point correction ON, and a communication start request including the SQN value and the holding point value are transmitted to the S units, and the SQNs of the S units and the number of points are determined. To correct.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, processing when an operation instruction from the CU (no requested operation) has not reached S units will be described. Here, a sequence from the start of one game by 3BET to the time when a winning occurs and 15 points are awarded to the player is illustrated.

  The S unit receives the operation instruction command from the CU, and backs up the current addition / subtraction number stored in the current point-related information storage area as the pre-addition / subtraction number in the previous point-related information storage area. The backup clear process is performed to store the current addition / subtraction data stored in the current point-related information storage area to 0, but in the case of FIG. Not yet reached. Therefore, the above-described backup clear process is not performed on the S units. As a result, a subtraction number is generated by setting the number of bets, and each time an additional number is generated by winning, the data is added and stored in the current score related information storage area as current score related information.

  First, it is assumed that at a certain time when the current number of points is 520, the S units have returned an action response (both the addition number and the subtraction number are 0) to the CU before the start of the 3BET game. Subsequently, the CU sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the S units as an operation instruction. However, since the command does not reach the S units, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described based on FIG. 21, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the S units again. If this re-transmission does not reach the S units, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU, so the CU performs the second retransmission for the same operation instruction. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n, and the addition update of “1” is not performed. In the meantime, the 3BET game starts and eventually ends.

  When the command reaches S units in the second retransmission, the 3 BET game has started and ended on the S units until the operation instruction is reached, as described above. In addition, 3 subtractions are generated and 15 additions corresponding to winnings are generated. For this reason, the S units store the data of the subtraction number = 3 as the current score related information at the start of the game, and further store the data of the addition number = 15 as the current score related information at the end of the game. Then, using the stored addition number = 15 and subtraction number = 3, the current score number = 520 + 15−3 = 532 is calculated, and as an operation response, SQN = n + 1, score number = 532, addition number = 15. The response of the operation response of the subtraction number = 3 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a score = 520 + 15 (addition number) −3 (number of subtraction) = 532, and corrects the score and stores it in 532.

  In this way, the S units have points as the game progresses while the state in which the operation instruction for instructing the transmission of the operation response cannot be received even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the first operation response was transmitted. The stored change amount is updated based on the change amount. Then, when an operation instruction is received, the updated change amount of the score is transmitted as an addition number and a subtraction number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the processing when the operation response from the S units (response to the absence of requested operation) has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 47, since the command from the CU is input to the S units, the above-described backup clear processing is executed, but the value of the SQN of the command transmitted from the next CU to the S unit is performed. Is the same as the value of the previous SQN, the S units determine that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is a retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and the pre-addition that is the previous score related information The current addition subtraction number as the current point related information is added to the subtraction number data without clearing the data of zero.

  In FIG. 47, a winning occurs after the first game with 3BET is started, 10 points are awarded to the player, and the operation response from the S machines is not yet received until the second game with 3BET is started. The sequence in case of reaching is illustrated.

  Specifically, assuming that the current number of points is 520, the CU first sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the S units as an operation instruction. In response to this, on the S platform side, a 3BET operation is detected, and at that stage, data of addition number = 0, subtraction number = 3, and holding point = 517 are generated. In this case, the S units store the data of the addition number = 0 and the subtraction number = 3 in the pre-addition number and the pre-subtraction number and store SQN = n + 1 as a backup, and create an operation response command including them. , SQN = n + 1, the number of holding points = 517, the addition number = 0, and the subtraction number = 3 response is transmitted to the CU. Further, the S units clear 0 of the data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number as the current point-related information.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as that of the previous time, that is, no request, SQN = n command to the S units.

  In response to this, a prize equivalent to 10 points is generated on the S side, and at that stage, data of addition number = 10, subtraction number = 0, and score = 527 is generated. Since the SQN of the operation instruction command received this time and the SQN of the operation instruction command received last time have the same value n, the S units are retransmitted because the response of the transmitted operation response has not reached the CU. The data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number as the current point related information is added to the data without clearing the previous addition number and the previous subtraction number data as the previous holding point related information. And back up. As a result, the previous addition number = 0 + 10 = 10 and the previous subtraction number = 3 + 0 = 3.

  The S units clear the data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number to 0 after creating the response of the operation response composed of these data. Then, as an operation response, the S units transmit a response of SQN = n + 1, the number of points = 527, the number of additions = 10, and the number of subtractions = 3 to the CU. However, since this response also does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) command to the S units again.

  In response to this, the S unit detects that both the previous SQN and the current SQN are n and have not changed, and detects that the response of the operation response is a retransmission because it has not reached the CU. To do. At this stage, on the S platform side, a 3BET operation for starting the second game is detected, and data of addition number = 0, subtraction number = 3, and holding points = 524 are generated.

  In this case, the S units store the data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number as the current point-related information without clearing the data of the previous addition number and the previous subtraction number as the previous point-related information. Add and back up. As a result, the previous addition number = 10 + 0 = 10 and the previous subtraction number = 3 + 3 = 6.

  The S units clear the data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number to 0 after creating the response of the operation response composed of these data. Then, as an operation response, the S units transmit a response of SQN = n + 1, the number of points = 524, the number of additions = 10, and the number of subtractions = 6 to the CU.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the score = 520 + 10−6 = 524, and performs processing for correcting and storing the score data in the 524.

  As described above, when the previously transmitted operation response does not reach the CU, the S units do not transmit the next operation response after retransmitting the unreachable operation response, but the information that has not been reached. The information after adding up is transmitted as the next operation response. As a result, the gaming apparatus can reliably and efficiently collect information on the number of points. In the example of FIG. 47, the case where the operation response from the S unit has not reached once has been described. However, if the operation response has not reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is not included. , The total value obtained by adding the motion response information transmitted the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, processing when an operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached S units will be described. The current number of points is set to 520, the number of requests for addition when there is a replay operation for saving medals or a prepaid balance is set to 25, and first, the CU has an operation request as an addition instruction, SQN = n, and addition A command including data of the number of requests = 25 is transmitted to the S units.

  However, since the command does not reach the S units, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the command with the same operation instruction. Since the retransmission command has not reached the S units, the corresponding response from the S units is not transmitted to the CU. Therefore, as described above, the CU performs the second retransmission for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches S units. During the period when the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, the S units add and subtract the addition / subtraction data to the current addition / subtraction number as the current point-related information without performing the above-described backup clear processing.

  Then, the S units calculate the current number of points = 520 + 25 (number of addition requests) +10 (current number of additions) −3 (current number of subtractions) = 552, set the current number of points data to 552, and send a response of the operation response. create. Specifically, the S units transmit a response of addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of points = 552, the number of additions = 10, and the number of subtractions = 3 as operation responses to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the score = 520 + 25 + 10−3 = 552, and corrects and stores the score data in 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a process when the operation response from the S units (response to the addition request) has not been reached will be described. Here, an explanation will be given of a case where, with the initial number of points = 520, an operation for using the game as a replay of a saved medal or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is performed and an addition request for 25 points is generated. In addition, here is a sequence in the case where a prize is awarded after the first game with 3BET has started on the S platform, and then 10 points are awarded after the second game with 3BET has started. Illustrate.

  First, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n, and the number of addition requests = 25 to the S units. On the S side, the subtraction number = 3 is generated in order to start the first game with 3 bets, and therefore, on the S side, the addition number = 0 as the stored current score related information. The subtraction number = 3 and the data of SQN = n + 1 are back-up stored in the previous score-related information storage area, and the score number = 520 + 25 + 0−3 = 542 is calculated and the score number = 542 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the S units clear the stored data in the current score-related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, score number = 542, addition number = A response of 0, subtraction number = 3 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the S units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the S units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In S units, when the command is received and SQN is the same value n as the previous time, it is detected that the transmitted response is retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and added to the received command. Although the number of requests = 25 is included, the addition of the score based on the command is not updated. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  On the S side, a subtraction number = 3 has been generated in order to start the second game with 3 bets at that stage. Therefore, on the S side, the previous score-related information storage area has already been stored. The data stored in the current score related information storage area, that is, the number of additions = 0 and the number of subtractions = 3 are added to the previous score-related information, and stored. Then, the number of score points = 542 + 0−3 = 539 is calculated, the score is corrected to 539 and stored.

  After that, the S units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 539, number of additions = 0, number of subtractions = 6 are transmitted as response to the CU as operation responses.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the S units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the addition update corresponding to the addition request is not performed while the addition request number = 25 is received, and the addition update corresponding to the addition request is not performed twice. At this stage, the number of additions = 10 is generated on the S side due to the second game winning. Therefore, on the S side, as described above, after storing in the previous score-related information storage area, calculating the number of points, generating a response, and clearing the current score-related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, Add refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 549, number of additions = 10, number of subtractions = 6 responses are sent to the CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the score = 520 + 25 + 10−6 = 549, corrects the score to 549, and stores it.

  As described above, when the S units receive the command including the addition request number data transmitted from the CU, the SQN value included in the command is the same as the SQN value of the previous command. Determines that it is a re-transmission, does not determine that it is an additional addition request, does not update the points, and does not perform double execution of the addition update according to the addition request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, processing when an operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU has not reached S units will be described. A case will be described where the initial number of points is 520 and a request for subtraction of 300 points is generated due to the occurrence of a wagon order or the like. First, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of subtraction requests = 300 to the S units. However, since the command did not reach the S units, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the S units again. Since this re-send command has not reached the S units, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU performs a second retransmission of the same operation instruction command. This second retransmission command reaches S units.

  In the S unit, during the period in which the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, as in the process of FIG. 46, each time the addition number and the subtraction number are generated, the data is stored in the current score related information storage area. For example, in FIG. 50, it is assumed that the addition number = 10 and the subtraction number = 0. Then, when the command for the third operation instruction is finally input to the S units, the score = 520−300 + 10−0 = 230 is calculated and the score = 230 is stored. Then, a response of subtraction rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 230, number of additions = 10, number of subtractions = 0 is transmitted to the CU as an operation response.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a score = 520−300 + 10−0 = 230, and corrects and stores the score in 230.

  As described above, when subtracting from the score, the CU first transmits an operation instruction command including data of the subtraction request presence and the number of subtraction requests to the S units, and the response as an operation response to the command is a CU. Waiting for the response to, subtract the subtraction request from the score. Although the main management function for adding and subtracting points to manage the current points is on the CU side, the CU side includes the number of additions and subtractions from the S units to the points that change every moment as the game progresses. It is possible to calculate the current score by adding / subtracting the score for the first time after the motion response is returned, and for the period of waiting for the response from the S units, the score at the CU compared to the S units. The calculation time of is delayed.

  Therefore, the current score data on the CU side is data with a time delay with respect to the S units, and even if there are as many current points on the CU side as the number of subtraction requests, Actually, there may be no points remaining for the number of subtraction requests. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when subtracting the score, the CU waits for the response of the operation response from the S units and subtracts the score for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a process when the operation response from the S units (response to the subtraction request) has not reached the CU will be described. Here, a sequence in the case where a winning in which 10 points are awarded after the start of the 3BET game on the S side is illustrated.

  Assuming that the initial number of points is 520 and the number of subtraction requests is 300, the CU first sends a command of subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of subtraction requests = 300 to the S units as operation instructions. On the S side, the subtraction number = 3 is generated in order to start the game with 3 bets. Therefore, on the S side, the addition number = 0, the subtraction number as the current point-related information. = 3 and SQN = n + 1 are backed up and stored in the previous point-related information storage area, and the number of points = 520−300 + 0−3 = 217 is calculated and the number of points = 217 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the S units clear the stored data in the current score related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, score number = 217, addition number = A response of 0, subtraction number = 3 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the S units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the S units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In S units, the command is received and SQN is the same n value as the previous time, so it is detected that the transmitted response is retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and is subtracted from the received command. Although the number of requests = 300 is included, the score subtraction update based on the command is not performed. That is, the subtraction update corresponding to the subtraction request is not executed twice.

  Further, in the S platform, since the retransmission of the command has been detected, the current score related information is stored with respect to the previous score related information already stored in the previous score related information storage area, as in the process of FIG. The data stored in the area, that is, the addition number = 10 and the subtraction number = 3 are added and stored. Here, the number of additions = 10 is based on the winning result of the game. Further, the score is calculated as 217 + 10−0 = 227, the score is corrected to 227, and stored.

  After that, the S units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, the addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of score points = 227, the number of additions = 10, and the number of subtractions = 3 are transmitted as responses to the CU as operation responses.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the S units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, while subtraction request count = 300 is received, subtraction update is not performed, and subtraction update in response to the subtraction request is not performed twice. In the same manner as described above, after storing in the previous score-related information storage area, calculating the number of points, generating a response, and clearing the current score-related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of holding points = 227, number of additions = 10, number of subtractions = 3 is transmitted to the CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the score = 520−300 + 10−3 = 227, corrects the score to 185, and stores it.

  As described above, when the S units receive the command including the addition request number data transmitted from the CU, the SQN value included in the command is the same as the SQN value of the previous command. Determines that it is a re-transmission, does not determine that it is an additional subtraction request, does not perform subtraction update of holding points, and does not perform double execution of subtraction update in response to the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a process when the S units return an addition rejection response to the CU addition request will be described. Here, a sequence in the case where a winning in which 10 points are awarded on the S platform side has occurred and a new game has not started thereafter is illustrated. Here, it is assumed that the initial score is 520 and the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU is 1000 yen.

  First, as an operation instruction from the CU, a command of no request, SQN = n, and C-ID is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, on the S platform side, the number of additions = 10 is generated due to the occurrence of a prize. Therefore, the S platform calculates the score = 520 + 3-0 = 523, and the number of scores, additions, and subtractions An operation response including data, SQN = n + 1, and C-ID is returned to the CU. The CU calculates a score based on the motion response and corrects the score to 523.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits, as operation instructions, a command with an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and the number of addition requests = 25 to the S units. In the S unit, for some reason, a response of an operation response including addition rejection ON that rejects addition is returned to the CU.

  Since the CU has received an operation response including addition rejection OFF, the CU cannot add points in the S units, and determines that a difference in points has occurred between the S units and the CU. In this case, the CU transmits a communication disconnection request command to the S units in order to disconnect the communication connection. In response to this, the S platform returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU and disconnects the communication connection. Further, the S units are set in a game prohibited state. Specifically, a BET impossible signal is transmitted from the LSI 117 to the main control board 116, so that a new game cannot be started.

  The S units further have SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the previous number of additions, the number of previous subtractions = 0, the number of previous subtractions = 0, the number of current points as the current number = 520, the number of current additions = 3. Store current subtraction number = 0.

  Next, after performing chip ID authentication between the CU and the S platform, a recovery request command and a recovery response are transmitted and received. In the response of this recovery response, the above-described recovery data stored on the S side is transmitted to the CU side.

  In accordance with the recovery data (current addition number = 3, current subtraction number = 0), the CU calculates the number of holding points = 545 + 3-0 = 548 and backs up. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the reconnection process (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 33, and the CU transmits a command including the point correction ON and the point = 548 to the S units in the communication start request. The S platform receives this and corrects the score to 548. The CU determines that the connection sequence is restarted after transmitting a communication disconnection request and disconnecting the communication, and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 33 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power-on in FIG. To do.

  In the processing of FIG. 52, since the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from the S units, a response including addition rejection ON is received as the operation response from the S units. Even if a reply is received, the balance consumption has already been confirmed on the CU side at an earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a process when the S units return a subtraction rejection response to the CU subtraction request will be described. Here, a sequence when a 3 BET game is started on the S platform side in the middle is illustrated.

  First, assuming that the initial number of points is 502, the number of additions is 0 and the number of subtractions is 0 when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received one round trip between the CU and the S units. There is no change in points.

  At this stage, when a wagon service order or the like occurs and a 500-point subtraction request is generated, the CU sends a command of subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and subtraction request count = 500 to the S units as operation instructions. Send. At the stage of receiving this command, the S number side has a subtraction number = 3 in order to start a game with three bets, and the current number of points that the S number grasps = 502-3 = 499. It has become. As a result, since the current number of points (499) is smaller than the number of subtraction requests (500), the 500 subtraction requests cannot be satisfied. Therefore, the S units transmit a response of subtraction rejection ON indicating that the subtraction request is rejected, SQN = n + 3, number of points = 499, number of additions = 0, number of subtractions = 3 to the CU as an operation response.

  In response, the CU calculates a score = 502 + 0-3 = 499 and corrects the score to 499. Then, subtraction rejection is detected, and subtraction cancellation processing is performed. In the subtraction cancellation process, for example, the display 312 displays a message such as “Cannot subtract due to lack of points”.

Thereafter, exchange of normal operation instructions and operation responses is repeated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a process when the S units return a clear rejection response to the CU clear instruction request will be described. A sequence in the case where 10 winnings are generated immediately after the return button is pressed is illustrated.

  When the return button 322 is pressed down with the initial number of points = 520, as in the process of FIG. 42, the CU commands the S units to include data indicating prohibited requests and clear requests as operation instructions. Is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, the S unit controls the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) in which the bet number cannot be set, and returns an operation response of prohibition rejection OFF, game prohibition, and game completion OFF to the S unit. . Thereafter, a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time is provided. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. Then, when the wait time has elapsed, the S units transmit a game prohibition and game completion ON response to the CU as operation responses. As a result, the CU determines that the S units are in a game prohibited state.

  Thereafter, after updating the score, the CU transmits an operation instruction command of clear request present and clear display ON to the S units. Receiving it, the S unit transmits a response of an operation response of clear rejection ON indicating that it cannot be cleared for some reason to the CU. The CU detects clear rejection by this response. Then, the CU transmits a command including no clear request as an operation instruction to the S units, and performs clear cancel processing. This clear canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Return operation is performed but canceling is not possible” on the display 312.

  Upon receiving this operation instruction, the S units determine that the clear process corresponding to the return operation has been canceled. The S units transmit an operation response including clear rejection OFF to the CU. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instructions and response is performed between the CU and the S platform.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a process when the S units return a permission rejection response to the CU game permission request will be described. The initial number of points is set to 520, and in a trouble state in which some game prohibition factor occurs, an operation instruction command and an operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units in a state where S games are prohibited. Suppose that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game elimination factor elimination” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the S units as operation instructions. However, the S units return a command of an operation response including a permission rejection ON for rejecting a game permission request for some reason, that is, a state where the game cannot be continued, to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including a game permission request to the S machines as an operation instruction until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a process when the S units return a prohibition rejection response to the CU game prohibition request will be described. The initial number of points is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units. For example, at the stage of “game prohibition factor occurrence” in FIG. It is assumed that a game prohibition factor such as operation of the button 322 occurs. At this stage, the CU transmits a command of game prohibition request and SQN = n + 2 to the S units as operation instructions. In the S machine, the response of the operation response including the prohibition rejection ON for rejecting the game prohibition request for some reason is returned to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition refusal, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the S units as an operation instruction until the game is prohibited.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a description will be given of processing when the S platform returns a front door opening rejection response to the CU front door opening request. Here, a sequence in the case where a winning with 10 points is generated is illustrated.

  When an input of an instruction to open the front door 2b is detected with the initial number of points = 520, although not shown in FIG. 57, as in the process of FIG. While the command to open the door is transmitted to the S units, the S unit receives the command and sets the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state), and also includes a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition as the operation response. To the CU. Similarly to the processing of FIG. 44, the S units provide a waiting time (for example, 10 seconds) of 4.1 seconds or more corresponding to one game regulation time. In the meantime, the number of additions = 10 occurs with the occurrence of a prize on the S platform side, and an operation response including the number of additions = 10 is transmitted from the S platform to the CU. After that, even during the wait time, a command with a prohibition request and a front door opening request is transmitted from the CU to the S units.

  However, in response to this, the S platform transmits a response to the operation response including the front door opening rejection ON which refuses to unlock and open the front door 2b for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects front door open refusal, sends a command including no front door open request to the S units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing front door open cancel processing. . The front door opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “The front door cannot be opened” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side after reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. Here, a sequence in the case where a game is finished without winning after a new game with 3 BET has started after 10 points have been won is illustrated.

  With the initial number of points = 520 and SQN = n, the CU transmits an operation instruction command to the S units. In response to this, on the S platform side, the number of additions = 10 is generated due to the occurrence of a prize. Therefore, the S platform has SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of points = 530, number of additions = 10, An operation response including addition / subtraction data of subtraction number = 0 is transmitted to the CU. When the operation response reaches the CU, the CU corrects the score to 530. If a power failure occurs in the CU at that stage, commands from the CU are no longer transmitted to the S units.

  In this case, as described with reference to FIG. 22, if the S unit has not received a command for 4 seconds or more, it determines that the communication has been interrupted, transitions to an unconnected state, and plays a game prohibited state (“Play Stop” in the drawing). )). However, as shown in FIG. 58, the number of subtractions = 3 is already set at the stage where the power interruption occurs, and a new game is started. In this case, the progress of the newly started game itself is not stopped. As a result, the subtraction data is stored in the current score related information storage area based on the subtraction number = 3, and accordingly, score = 530 + 0−3 = 527 is calculated and the score = 527 is stored.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and started up, a communication control IC sequence is first performed as in the process of FIG. Next, after performing chip ID authentication between the CU and the S platform, a recovery request command and a recovery response are transmitted and received. In the response of this recovery response, the above-described recovery data stored on the S side is transmitted to the CU side.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, previous addition number = 10, previous subtraction number = 0, current number of points as current number = 527, current addition number = 0, Current subtraction number = 3 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the communication partner is the same, and that the SQN included in the recovery data on the S side matches the SQN stored on the CU side, and the recovery data sent in the recovery response is used as a basis. The process of correcting the backup value is performed. Specifically, the number of points is corrected to 530 (the number of points of the CU) +0 (current number of additions) −3 (current number of subtractions) = 527, cumulative addition = 10, and cumulative subtraction = 3.

  In FIG. 58, an example has been described in which, after 10 winnings are generated, the game is ended without generating a winning after a new 3BET game is started. However, immediately after the start of a new 3BET game, the “disconnection detection (play stop)” in FIG. 58 occurs, the bet number operation becomes impossible, and a winning may occur after that.

  In such a case, recovery data is generated including the added points due to winnings that occur after “cut detection (play stop)”. For example, if the winning is 15 points, the “current number” of “recovery data” in FIG. 58 is “current addition number = 15” and “current number of points = 527 + 15”.

  Hereinafter, the recovery will be further described. In any case, the external output information (betting number setting information, reel start information, internal winning status information shown in FIG. When a change occurs in the third stop operation information, the first to third stop information, and the result confirmation information), recovery data including external output information corresponding to the change is generated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation instruction. Here, a sequence in the case where 10 winnings have occurred since the start of one game by 3BET is illustrated.

  The S units that received the operation instruction command with the initial number of points = 520, as the operation response, the response of SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of points = 517, addition number = 0, subtraction number = 3 to the CU. Send. Accordingly, the CU corrects the score to 517. Thereafter, the CU transmits a command of no request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID to the S units as an operation instruction. If the command does not reach the S units and the power is cut off at the CU immediately after that, the S unit cannot receive the command for more than 4 seconds after sending the last response, as in the process of FIG. If it is determined that the communication has been interrupted, a transition is made to the unconnected state and the game is prohibited. However, as shown in FIG. 59, in the case where the game has already started at the stage where the power is cut off, the progress of the already started game is not stopped. As a result, in the example of FIG. 59, as a result of the already started game, 10 points are won, and the number of additions = 10. The memory based on the added number is stored in the current score-related information storage area, and accordingly, score = 517 + 10−0 = 527 is calculated and the score = 527 is stored.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and started in the CU, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received in the same manner as in the processing of FIG. With the stand.

  In the S units, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, previous addition number = 0, previous subtraction number = 3, current number of points = 527, current addition number = 10, The current subtraction number = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one from the S side. Therefore, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Perform processing. Specifically, the number of points is corrected to 517 (the number of points of the CU) +10 (current number of additions) −0 (current number of subtractions) = 527, cumulative addition = 10, and cumulative subtraction = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. Here, a sequence in the case where 10 winnings have occurred since the start of one game by 3BET is illustrated.

  In FIG. 60, when the initial number of points is 520, the first operation instruction and the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, and then the second operation instruction is transmitted to the S units, and SQN = n + 3, Operation responses of C-ID, number of points = 517, number of additions = 0, number of subtractions = 0 are transmitted from the S units to the CU.

  However, the second operation response does not reach the CU, and the CU has been turned off before the CU executes the operation response process according to the operation response. In this case, the S units detect the disconnection of communication and enter the game prohibited state if no command is transmitted when 4 seconds elapse after the transmission of the second operation response.

  Next, in the case where the power failure is recovered in the CU and started up, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as the processing of FIG. With the stand.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the previous number of additions as the previous number = 0, the number of previous subtractions = 0, the current number of points as the current number = 527, the current number of additions = 10, The current subtraction number = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is delayed by one from the S side, so that the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of points = 517 (the number of points of the CU) + 0 (the number of current additions) + 10 (the number of current additions)-0 (the number of current subtractions)-0 (the number of current subtractions) = 527, the cumulative total = 0 (the number of current additions) Addition number) +10 (current addition number), subtraction accumulation = 0 (current subtraction number) +0 (current subtraction number).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the control contents when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 58 occurs. (A) shows a case where a CU is replaced with a new CU and becomes inconsistent, and (b) shows a case where S units are replaced with a new S unit and become inconsistent.

  For example, a power failure occurs due to a failure of a CU, and the failed CU is often replaced with a new CU. In the amusement hall, a plurality of CUs are aged by unit stockers. This aging is a standby state connected to a host server. FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the failed CU is replaced by the CU aged by the unit stocker, connected to the S unit, and restarted. In this case, it is determined that the connected party (S units) is different based on the device information response sent from the S units, and the recovery data of the S units is not used for correcting the points. In this case, since the S units display untransmitted data when the CU is not connected, if there is untransmitted data, the number of points on the card is manually corrected by the POS at the game hall. Specifically, the maintenance screen is displayed on the display S 51 on the S platform side so that unsent data to the CU can be confirmed. If unsent data is displayed, it is artificially performed by a game store clerk. Perform manual correction. This prevents the player from suffering a loss.

  Instead of the artificial manual correction, automatic correction may be performed under a certain condition as indicated by a broken line. A modification of this automatic correction will be described below.

  First, the CU receives a recovery response including the C-ID, and temporarily stores the C-ID. In that state, it waits for the card to be inserted, and when the card is inserted, the C-ID recorded on the card is read and sent as a recovery response with the C-ID of the inserted card. It is determined whether or not the C-ID matches, and if it matches, the following correction processing is performed.

Number of points = 527, cumulative addition = 0, subtractive cumulative = 3
If the C-ID determination results do not match, a process of transmitting the current number of points included in the recovery response to the upper server 801 is performed. At that time, the C-ID included in the recovery data may also be transmitted to the upper server 801. Receiving it, the upper server 801 backs up the current number of points received in association with the C-ID. In the case where the determination results of the C-IDs do not match, the player is playing a game during a replacement operation in which the CU fails and is replaced with a new CU that is aged while the player is playing a game. This is a case where the continuation is given up and another player inserts a card to start the game after the replacement work is completed. In such a case, it is necessary to compensate for a loss for a player who has given up continuation of the game during the replacement work. A player who gives up the continuation of such a game causes the host server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and discharges it in association with the member card as a stored medal. And make it possible to exchange prizes. In addition, when a player who has given up continuation of the game has left the game hall and then leaves the game hall, the player who has left the game hall is present on the upper server 801 for several days so that the loss can be compensated. The number of points is backed up, and the player who has visited the store again causes the host server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and discharges the current number of points backed up in association with the member card. It may be possible to exchange prizes.

  The condition for automatically correcting the backup value may be that a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has not elapsed in addition to the C-ID matching determination. In other words, the work of replacing a failed CU with a new CU is completed in about 10 minutes. Therefore, after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) in which the replacement work can be sufficiently performed, the card is inserted. Even if it is determined that the C-IDs coincide with each other after insertion, the backup data may not be automatically corrected.

  If the failed CU is a minor failure and can be communicated, the CU is returned to the unit stocker, and the number of points and C-ID together with the stocker ID are transmitted from the unit stocker to the upper server 801, and A new CU connected to the S unit transmits the score data and the like corrected based on the recovery data from the S unit to the upper server 801, and the upper server 801 collates the data such as both score points. You may control to confirm whether it corresponds. If they do not match, an abnormality determination is performed and a predetermined abnormality process such as abnormality notification is performed.

  Furthermore, instead of the CU performing data correction based on the recovery data transmitted from the S units, the recovery data may be downloaded from the upper server 801 and the CU may perform data correction. Specifically, the CU periodically transmits data such as the number of points and C-ID to the upper server 801, stores it in the upper server 801 as a backup, is replaced with a new CU, and is connected to the S units. When the C-ID included in the subsequent recovery response matches the C-ID recorded on the card inserted in the CU, the C-ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the C-ID Recovery data such as the number of points stored in backup corresponding to the ID may be downloaded and stored in the CU.

  FIG. 61 (b) shows a case where the S units are replaced with new ones after the power is turned off and connected. In that case, first, a startup process is performed, and a device information request, a device information response, an authentication request, an authentication response, a recovery request, and a recovery response are transmitted and received. Then, the CU determines that the S units of the connection partner are different based on the device information response, and does not use the recovery data of the S units for the correction of the score. The original S units of recovery data that was installed before the new S units were replaced are manually corrected by POS with the intervention of a game hall clerk.

  FIG. 62 shows the control when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 59 occurs. In the control of FIG. 62, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 61 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 63 shows the control when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 60 occurs. In the control of FIG. 63, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 61 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the addition request is reached. Here, an example of a sequence from the start of one game by 3BET until a prize is generated and 10 points are awarded to the player is illustrated.

  The initial number of points = 13 and the prepaid balance is 1000 yen, and normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, and the addition number = 0 and subtraction number = 3 generated in the meantime On the basis of the score = 10, the lending button 321 is pressed.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of addition requests = 25, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and the number of addition requests = 25 as operation instructions to the S units. If this command does not reach the S machines, the S machine detects a disconnection and puts it in a game prohibited state after 4 seconds have elapsed since the last response was sent and no command was received.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 21, when there is no response from the S units when the command has not arrived, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and S units perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG.

  In S units, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of additions as the previous number = 0, the number of previous subtractions = 3, the number of current points as the current number = 20, the number of current additions = 10, The current subtraction number = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is one more advanced than the SQN on the CU side, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of points is corrected to 10 (the number of CU points) +25 (the number of requests for addition) +10 (the number of current additions) −0 (the number of current subtractions) = 45, cumulative addition = 10, and cumulative subtraction = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request. Here, an example of a sequence in the case where a 15-point winning has occurred after the start of a 3BET game in the middle is shown.

  The initial number of points is 5 and the prepaid balance is 1000 yen, and after a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 2, C-ID, the number of addition requests = 25, calculates balance = 1000 yen-500 yen = 500 yen, and determines the balance consumption at this stage by setting the balance to 500 yen. . Then, the CU transmits, to the S units, an operation instruction having an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and the number of addition requests = 25.

  On the S side, the subtraction number = 3 is generated in order to start the game with 3 bets. Therefore, on the S side, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of points = 27. The response of the addition number = 0 and the subtraction number = 3 is transmitted to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to this response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 22, the S unit determines that communication has been interrupted when it has not received a command for 4 seconds or more, and transitions to an unconnected state and enters a game prohibited state. In addition, on the S platform side, the number of additions = 10 occurs due to the occurrence of a win during that time, the storage of the current score-related information storage area is updated, and the score = 27 + 10 = 37 is calculated and the score = 37 is stored.

  Next, in the case where the power failure is recovered in the CU and started up, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as the processing of FIG. With the stand.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the previous addition number = 0, the previous subtraction number = 3, the current number of points = 37, the current addition number = 10, The current subtraction number = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is delayed by one from the S units, so that the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of score points = 5 (number of score points of CU) +25 (number of addition requests) +0 (number of previous additions) +10 (current number of additions) −3 (number of previous subtractions) −0 (number of current subtractions) = 37, Addition accumulation = 0 (previous addition number) +10 (current addition number), subtraction accumulation = 3 (previous subtraction number) +0 (current subtraction number).

  FIG. 66 shows the control when the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 64 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 66, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 61 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 65 occurs. In the control of FIG. 67, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 61 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the subtraction request is reached. Here, a sequence in the case where 10 winnings have occurred since the start of one game by 3BET is illustrated.

  When the initial score is 520, normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, and the score becomes 517 according to the number of subtractions = 3 generated during that time. When a subtraction request of 300 is generated due to a wagon service request or the like, in the CU, SQN = n + 2, subtraction request count = 300, subtraction request is present, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, subtraction request count = 300 A command is transmitted to S units.

  When this command does not reach the S units, the S unit detects a disconnection and puts it in a game prohibited state after 4 seconds have elapsed since the last response was transmitted and no command was received.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 21, when there is no response from the S units when the command has not arrived, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and the S unit perform the chip ID authentication sequence and transmit / receive the recovery request and the recovery response.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and the S unit perform transmission / reception of device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, recovery response,.

  In the S units, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, previous addition number = 0, previous subtraction number = 3, current number of points = 527, current addition number = 10, The current subtraction number = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is one more advanced than the SQN on the S unit side, so it is determined that the subtraction request has not been executed on the S unit, and has been transmitted as a recovery response A process for correcting the backup value based on the recovery data is performed. Specifically, the number of points is corrected to 517 (the number of points of the CU) +10 (current number of additions) −0 (current number of subtractions) = 527, cumulative addition = 10, and cumulative subtraction = 0.

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed in the S units based on the value of the SQN, and the subtraction request of 300 is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery process. The subtraction request number 300 is not subtracted from the number of points.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the subtraction request is reached. Here, a sequence in the case where a 3 BET game is started after a winning with 10 points on the S platform side has occurred, and then a winning with 10 points is generated is illustrated.

  When the initial number of points is set to 520, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, and at the stage where the number of points becomes 530 according to the added number generated during that time, 300 When a wagon service request is generated, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of subtraction requests = 300, and, as an operation instruction, sends a command with a subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and the number of subtraction requests = 300. Send to the stand.

  In response to this, on the S side, a subtraction number = 3 is generated in order to start a game with 3 bets. Therefore, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of points = 227, addition number = A response of 0, subtraction number = 3 is transmitted to the CU. However, if the response does not reach the CU and the power failure occurs before the operation response process corresponding to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S units thereafter.

  As described with reference to FIG. 22, the S unit determines that communication has been interrupted when it has not received a command for 4 seconds or more, and transitions to an unconnected state and enters a game prohibited state. In addition, 10 points have been won in the meantime, and the data of the current score related information storage area is updated accordingly, and accordingly, score = 227 + 10 = 237 is calculated and the score = 237 is stored. Is done.

  Next, in the case where the power failure is recovered in the CU and started up, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as the processing of FIG. With the stand.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the previous addition number = 0, the previous subtraction number = 3, the current number of points = 237, the current addition number = 10, Current subtraction number = 3 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is one delay behind the S units, it is determined that the S units have received the subtraction instruction, and the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response Based on the above, the backup value is corrected. Specifically, the number of points is 530 (the number of points of the CU) +0 (the number of previous additions) +10 (the number of current additions) −3 (the number of previous subtractions) −0 (the number of current subtractions) = 537, the cumulative total = 0 (the previous Addition number) +10 (current addition number), cumulative subtraction = 3 (previous subtraction number) +0 (current subtraction number).

  Further, the CU transmits a communication start request command of holding point correction ON and holding point = 537 to the S units. In response to this, the S platform corrects the score to 537 and stores it.

  As described above, even when it is determined that the S units have received the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction canceling process is that the S unit side that has received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process in accordance with the subtraction instruction. There is a possibility that the subtraction is rejected on the S platform side. In the case where such subtraction is rejected on the S side, if the subtraction is confirmed on the CU side, there is a disadvantage that the remaining number of points becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, when such a CU-side power interruption occurs, subtraction has been performed despite the fact that the remaining number on the S side is insufficient and the subtraction instruction should have been rejected. It is possible to prevent inconvenience that the remaining number of points on the table side becomes a negative value.

  FIG. 70 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 68 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 70, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 61 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 71 shows control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 69 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 71, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 61 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the clear request is reached. Here, a sequence in the case where a winning in which 10 points are awarded after the start of the 3BET game on the S side is illustrated.

  In the sequence shown in FIG. 72, the score is 500 when the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed. In FIG. 72, as in the process of FIG. 42, the CU transmits, to the S units, a command including data of prohibition request presence and prohibition request absence data for prohibiting a game as an operation instruction. In response to this, the S units control to a bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) in which a bet number cannot be set. Thereafter, a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time is provided. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. At the stage when the wait time has elapsed, the S units respond as SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of points = 497, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 3, the game prohibition, and the game completion ON as an operation response. Send to CU.

  Thereafter, the CU updates the score to 497, and then transmits a clear request presence, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID operation instruction command to the S units. However, when the command does not reach the S units, the S unit detects disconnection and enters the game prohibited state after 4 seconds have elapsed since the last response was transmitted and no command was received. .

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 21, when there is no response from the S units when the command has not arrived, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and S units perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + N, C-ID, previous number of additions as previous number of times = 0, number of previous subtractions = 3, number of current points as current number = 507, number of current additions = 10, The current subtraction number = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is one more advanced than the SQN on the S side, so it is determined that the clear request has not arrived, and the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response is Based on this, the backup value is corrected. Specifically, the number of points is corrected to 497 (the number of current points) +10 (the number of current additions) −0 (the number of current subtractions) = 507, cumulative addition = 10, and cumulative subtraction = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a description will be given of a recovery process in the case where a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the clear request. Here, a sequence in the case where a new game is not started on the S platform side and no winning has occurred is illustrated.

  In the sequence of FIG. 73, the score is 500 when the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed. In FIG. 73, as in the process of FIG. 42, the CU transmits, to the S units, a command including data indicating a prohibition request for prohibiting a game and no clear request as an operation instruction. In response to this, the S units control to a bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) in which a bet number cannot be set. Thereafter, a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time is provided. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. At the stage when the wait time has elapsed, the S units respond as SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of points = 500, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 0, the game prohibition, and the game completion ON as an operation response. Send to CU.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 1, and sends a command including clear request, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 1, and C-ID as operation instructions to the S units.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the S platform clears the score to 0 and sets the score to 0 according to the clear request, and also clears SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0. = 0, C-ID, number of points = 0, number of addition = 0, number of subtraction = 0 response is transmitted to CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response processing corresponding to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 22, the S unit determines that communication has been interrupted when it has not received a command for 4 seconds or more, and transitions to an unconnected state.

  Next, in the case where the power failure is recovered in the CU and started up, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as the processing of FIG. With the stand.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, the previous addition number = 0, the previous subtraction number = 0, the current number of current points = 0, the current addition number = 0, the current subtraction number = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  Since the SQN on the S side is 0, the CU determines that the clear request has arrived on the CU side, and that the CU side has executed the clear process, and the backup value is based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. The process which corrects is performed. Specifically, the number of points = 500 (CU backup value) + 0 (current addition number)-0 (current subtraction number) = 500, addition cumulative = 0 (current addition number), subtraction cumulative = 0 (current subtraction number) To correct.

  As described above, the S units back up the data such as the addition number transmitted to the CU immediately before the communication failure state occurs even when the communication disabled state occurs. Then, the S units transmit recovery data including data transmitted to the CU immediately before the occurrence of the communication disabled state and data such as an addition number newly generated after the transmission to the CU during the recovery process. The recovery data includes the SQN of the data transmitted to the CU immediately before the occurrence of the communication disabled state. The CU compares the SQN with the SQN stored in the CU before the CU receives the data (update information transmitted immediately before) sent by the S units to the CU immediately before the communication failure occurs. It becomes possible for the CU to determine whether or not a communication disabled state has occurred.

  In FIG. 58 to FIG. 73, the change in game data on the S side from the time when communication is disabled until the game is prohibited (disconnection detection (play stop)) is “addition = 0, subtraction = 3”. However, if the game data further changes during that time, the S units further update the stored value based on the changed data.

  FIG. 74 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 72 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 74, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 61 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 75 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 73 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 75, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 61 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing transition of screens displayed on the CU side and the S platform side in correspondence with the control operation when the card shown in FIG. 35 is inserted. In FIG. 76, the screen shown on the left side of “CU” is the screen of the display unit 312 of the CU. On the other hand, the screen shown on the right side of “S” is the screen of the S display devices 51. Referring to FIG. 76, in the state where no card is inserted, an operation instruction command without an operation request is transmitted from the CU to the S unit during standby, and a response of holding point = 0 is received as an operation response. A response is sent from the S unit to the CU.

  During transmission / reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper left of FIG. 76, “None” in the column of “Card type” is displayed on the CU display 312. “0 points” is displayed in the title column of “Points”. Further, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper right of FIG. 76, the S display units 51 have “0 points” in the title column for “scoring points” and title columns for “card balance”. “0 yen” is displayed. Note that the display 312 and the display 51 display various data indicating the S game state at the present time. For example, in FIG. 76, the number of starts, the number of BBs, the number of RTs, and the number of highest consecutive chunks are displayed, and the number of starts between BBs is displayed as a bar graph.

  The number of start times is the number of times the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are started, that is, the number of games. The number of BBs is the number of times that a BB winning has occurred. The RT number is the number of times when RT (Replay Time) is reached. The maximum number of consecutive Changs is the maximum number of consecutive times that a BB prize is generated within a predetermined number of games after the end of BB. The number of starts between BBs is the number of games between a certain BB and the next BB.

  The display unit 312 on the CU side displays a set value amount display portion (“credit point amount setting” in FIG. 76) indicating how many loan amounts are deducted from the prepaid balance in one lending operation, Amount display section (“card balance” in FIG. 76), replay score display section (“replay score” in FIG. 76), saved medal count display section (“stored medal” in FIG. 76), lending rate A display unit (“Rent” in FIG. 76) is provided.

  Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured by a touch panel, and display items of “device information”, “setting change”, and “order menu” are displayed on the upper left of each display screen, and one of them is selected. By touching the screen, the display screen is changed to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 76, a screen in a state where “device information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided with a selection operation display section of “return”, “rental”, “replay”, and “call” in the lower part of each display screen. A command can be input to the CU by selecting and touching. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Lending" is touched, the points are lent out in exchange for the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card.

  If “Replay” is touched, the player can replay using the score of the inserted card (member card) or the accumulated medal. If “call” is touched, a notification for calling a game attendant is made.

  At the time when the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command without an operation request to the S units during the card insertion process as an operation instruction. In response to this, the S unit detects that the card insertion processing has been started on the CU side. After the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command, the host server (for example, the hall management computer 1) is in an inquiry state. In this inquiring state, the CU side display 312 displays “inquiry” as shown in the second “card balance inquiry screen” from the top, and also displays on the S side. The device 51 inquires the server of the inserted card with an arrow from the server to the IC displayed at the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second [normal screen (inquiring card balance)] from the top. Picture is displayed. “IC” in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  The S units that have received the above-described operation instruction return a response of holding point = 0 to the CU during standby as an operation response.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is verified by making an inquiry to the server and the score (= 5000) and balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. Then, the command of addition request number = 5000 and card balance = 7000 is transmitted to S units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed for addition. In the S units that have received this command, it is detected on the CU side that the card balance and holding points have been determined, and thereafter, addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, on the display unit 312 of the CU, “5000 points” is displayed in the display column of the score as shown in the third “loaned screen” from the top, and an arrow points toward the gaming machine. Display is made and the player is informed that 5000 points are being transmitted to the gaming machine. On the other hand, on the S platform, as shown in the third [normal screen (lending)] from the top, the display 51 displays an arrow from the IC toward the point display section and the card balance display section. Thus, a display indicating that the credit is being added (addition is being displayed) is made. Then, “5000 points” is displayed on the holding point display portion, and “7000 yen” is displayed on the card balance display portion.

  Next, a response including a score = 5000 is sent as an operation response from the S platform to the CU. In the CU, when 2 to 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movement display of the points indicating that the addition is being displayed, the addition display is terminated, and the “member” indicating the type of the inserted card is displayed as “ “5000 shots” is switched to a state of being displayed on the display 312. On the other hand, in the S platform, the addition display is ended after a lapse of 2-3 seconds from the start of the movement display of the holding point as the addition display is in progress, and the movement display of the holding point by the display unit 51 is ended.

  In this way, the display of the start of operation processing such as inquiries and addition display is started at the same time between the CU and S units, while the end of display of these operation processing ends from the CU to the S units. The command or the like is not transmitted and can be terminated at the unique timing on the S platform side, and is not constrained by the termination timing on the CU side. As a result, a unique display unique to the S platform can be performed.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a control process in the case where a player shares points by dividing and transferring points to others during a game. The flowchart shown in FIG. 77 and FIGS. 78 and 79, which will be described later, shows control in which a player can share points by dividing and transferring points to another person while continuing the game.

  Referring to FIG. 77, first, a card A as a membership card with a score of 5000 is inserted into the CU. If this membership card is inserted into the CU, the membership card will be returned to the player at the end of the game even if the gaming value of the membership card (score, saving medal and prepaid balance) is all zero. There must be.

  After the card A is inserted, the CU transmits to the S units a command including the number of addition requests = 5000 for adding “5000”, which is the score of the card A, on the S side. In response to the request, the S platform updates the score to 5000, and transmits a response including the score = 5000 as an operation response to the CU. After that, a game is started in the S machine, and when the score is decreased to 4000 as the game is executed, the score sharing (1000) is performed by transferring the score for 1000 points to another person and sharing the score (1000 When a point) designation operation is performed, the points are being divided between the CU and S units thereafter.

  The card B on which the points to be divided and transferred (share points) to another person are recorded, the stock card stocked in the card stock section in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 and compensated for. Although writing and discharging from the CU, in order to discharge the card B, it is necessary to first discharge the card A that has already been inserted into the card reader / writer 327. At that time, if all points (= 4000) at the present time are written on card A (member card owned by the player) and discharged, the score becomes 0 and the game can be continued thereafter. Disappear.

  Therefore, in order to make it possible to perform score division (score sharing) while playing a game, the card A is ejected from the CU in a state of “score = 0”, and the score corresponding to the score is CU To keep it as collateral information. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the card number of the inserted card A and the score number = 0 are transmitted to the upper server, and the stored score is searched in association with the card number received by the upper server. Update the score to 0. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card A.

  After the card A (point 0) is ejected from the card reader / writer 327 of the CU, the stock card B (point 0) in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 and compensated. At that time, the points are subtracted with the continuation of the game in the S units, and the points are in the state of 3800. A command including an operation request (operation instruction) with the number of subtraction requests = 1000 is transmitted from the CU to the S units in order to write 1000, which is a point to be divided and transferred (sharing points), to the card B. In response, the S unit subtracts 1000 from the current number of points 3800 to obtain the number of points = 2800, and transmits an operation response including the number of points = 2800 to the CU. In response, the CU backs up and stores the data of the score = 2800.

  Next, the CU writes “held point = 1000” to the card B by the card reader / writer 327 and returns (discharges) the card B. By handing out the discharged card B to another person, the points can be divided and transferred (sharing points) to others. If the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server, instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (score) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing points. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

  After ejecting the card B, the CU waits for reinsertion of the card A, which is the player's membership card that has been ejected first, and displays on the display 312 to prompt the user to insert the card A (see FIG. 85). Then, the player who sees it inserts the card A into the CU. At that time, the score is 2750. If the card A is inserted into the CU, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected due to the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers match). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. On the other hand, if they match, the process of dividing points (sharing points) ends, and a message to that effect is displayed on the display 312 ( (See FIG. 86).

  The inserted card A is written with the score as a score when the card is returned after the game ends, and is discharged from the CU.

  FIG. 78 shows a control operation in the case where a player performs divided transfer (sharing of points) while inserting a visitor card B in which 5,000 points are recorded into the CU and playing a game. Yes. In this case, since the card B inserted first is a visitor card that does not necessarily have to be returned to the player, the score to be divided by another person is written on the visitor card B inserted earlier. The points are shared by transferring the visitor card B to another person.

  First, by inserting a visitor card B (score = 5000) into the CU, an operation request including an addition request number = 5000 for adding all 5000 scores recorded on the inserted card B as scores. Operation instruction) is transmitted from the CU to the S units.

  In response to this, the S platform stores the score = 5000 and returns an operation response including the score = 5000 to the CU. From that stage, the game can be performed with S cars, and the game is in progress.

  Then, after the score is used in the game and the score becomes 4000, the player designates the sharing of the score (1000 points) to divide and transfer the score for 1000 points to another person. From this stage, the player is in the state of dividing points. At this stage, the score is further used for the game, and the score = 3800. Then, an operation request including a subtraction request count = 1000 for subtracting 1000 points for division transfer (sharing points sharing) from the CU is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In response to this, the S platform subtracts 1000 from the current score 3800 to set the score = 2800, and returns an operation response including the score = 2800 to the CU. In response to this, the CU stores the data of the score = 2800 as a backup. Then, “score = 1000” is written in the card B held by the card reader / writer 327, and the card B is returned (discharged).

  At this stage, the process of dividing and transferring the points (sharing points) ends. Even after that, if the player continues the game with the S units, and the player presses the return button 322 to end the game, the process proceeds to the card return process shown in FIG. 42 and is stocked in the CU. The stock card is taken out by the card reader / writer 327, and the score data corresponding to the score at that time is recorded on the stock card and discharged.

  If the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server, instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (score) 1000) which is the score to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score stored in association with the card number received by the higher server is searched, and the score is corresponded to the score received from the CU. The value is updated to the value (= 1000 points), and the card is stored as a history that the card has been divided and transferred (point sharing) and that 1000 points are points generated by the point sharing.

  Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B. And also about the stock card discharged | emitted at the time of a game end, the card number and the data of the number of points at the time of card | curd discharge | emission are transmitted to a high-order server, and it is matched with the card number received in the high-order server. In addition to storing, a history that the owner of the card B is changed to the owner of the stock card is stored. The CU then discharges the stock card.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of split transfer of points (sharing points). Differences from the control process shown in FIG. 77 will be mainly described. The flowchart shown in FIG. 79 is the same as FIG. 77 in that the card A, which is a player's membership card already inserted, is returned first when dividing and transferring points (sharing points). However, when the return is made, the remaining points are recorded as points on the card A after securing the necessary points (200 collateral points) to continue the game during the division of points. Is different from FIG.

  Specifically, first, the player operates display unit 312 including a touch panel to designate sharing of points to divide and transfer 1000 points. Then, the CU leaves the 1000 shared points to be split and transferred and the 200 collateral points described above, and calculates the remaining 3800 points. Specifically, the current score (5000) −collateral score (200) −shared score (1000) = 3800 is calculated. Then, in order to subtract the calculated 3800 points, the CU transmits an operation request command including the number of subtraction requests = 3800 to the S units. In response to this, the S units subtract 3800 from the current score 5000, and calculate and store the remaining score 1200. Then, an operation response including the score = 1200 is returned to the CU.

  The CU receives the operation response (response), leaves the collateral point = 200 and the shared possession point = 1000 in the CU, and writes the possession point = 3800 to the card A held by the card reader / writer 327. To discharge. In this way, in order to perform split transfer (score sharing) of points while continuing the game in the S units, the return of the card A that has been inserted leaving the collateral points for play (play: 200 points) in the CU Is done.

  Thereafter, the CU takes out the stock card (card B with 0 points) stocked in the CU to the card reader / writer 327 and compensates it. In the meantime, the game is continued in the S units, and as a result, the number of additions = 10 and the number of subtractions = 60 are generated. As a result, the score = 1200 + 10 (number of additions) −60 (number of subtractions) = 1150.

  Then, in the CU, an operation request command including the number of subtraction requests = 1000 is transmitted to the S units in order to divide and transfer (share point sharing) 1000 shared points.

  In response to this, the S units subtract the number of subtraction requests 1000 from the current score 1150 to calculate the remaining score = 150, and send an operation response response including the score = 150 to the CU.

  The CU receives it, writes “scoring point = 1000” in the card B, and returns (discharges) it. The player can perform the divided transfer of points (sharing points) by giving the discharged card B to another person.

  After the card B is discharged, the CU displays on the display 312 to prompt the player to reinsert the member card A that has been discharged. The player who sees it re-inserts the previously ejected card A (score = 3800) into the CU. In the meantime, the game continues with S units, and as a result, the number of additions = 10 and the number of subtractions = 85 are generated. Therefore, the score at the time when the card A is reinserted = 150 + 10−85 = 75.

  When the card A is reinserted, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected along with the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers are the same). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. On the other hand, if they match, the CU adds the score recorded on the card A = 3800 to the S units. Therefore, an operation request command including the number of addition requests = 3800 is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, the S platform calculates the score = 75 + 3800 = 3875, stores it as the current score, and transmits the response of the operation response including the score = 3875 to the CU.

  If the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server, instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (score) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing points. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

80 to 97 are screens displayed by the CU display 312. FIG.
First, based on FIGS. 80 to 86, a display screen displayed on the display 312 in the case of sharing the points shown in FIG. 77 will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 80, the player selects and designates sharing of points from a plurality of menus displayed by touching the display item (icon) of “Menu” displayed on the upper left half of the screen. This state is the display screen for sharing points shown in FIG. The sharing of points (divided transfer of points) can be either divided transfer from the player's own points or divided transfer from the stored medals. For this purpose, first, a message “Please select a point sharing source” is displayed, and a display item (icon) representing a point to be selected and a display item (icon) representing a medal are displayed.

  In the right half display screen of FIG. 80, the status of the card inserted at the present time is displayed. FIG. 80 shows that a membership card is inserted, and the membership card has a card balance of 0 yen, a score of 0 points, a medal saving of 500 points, and a current score of 10,000 points. .

  Further, as the state of the CU, it is displayed that the lending unit amount when lending points from the card balance is 500 yen, and 25 points corresponding to 500 yen is the number of payouts. Further, it is shown that the player can reload the card balance of the inserted card by inserting a bill into the CU.

  The player touches either “score” or “stored medal” on the left half of the screen to select and input a point sharing source. Here, a case where “point” is selected is shown.

  When the player selects “Point”, the screen shown in FIG. 81 is displayed. A message “Please select the number of points to share” is displayed on the left half of the screen, and 100 points, 200 points, 300 points, 4000 points, 500 points, 700 points, 1000 points, Nine types of 1500 points and 2000 points are displayed. The player selects and inputs one of these nine types. Here, a case where “1000 points” is selected and input will be described.

  If the player selects and inputs “1000 points”, the screen shown in FIG. 82 is displayed. On the screen shown in FIG. 82, a message “Are you sure you want to divide your score? It is displayed that the number of points of a shared card to be divided and transferred (point sharing) is 1000. Then, a display item (icon) of “starting sharing of points” and a display item (icon) of “cancel” are displayed. The player touches one of these display items to select and input. If “Cancel” is selected, sharing of points is canceled. On the other hand, if “start score sharing” is selected and input, the score sharing process is started as shown in the details of the number of points shared.

  If the player selects and inputs “Start point sharing”, then the screen shown in FIG. 83 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 83, a message “My card will be ejected” is displayed, and a score sharing processing status image indicating the progress of the score sharing processing is displayed. There are three types of points sharing processing status images 1, 2, and 3 in the processing order. In the first processing, the player's (player) card is discharged, the second processing is discharging the shared card, The re-insertion of your card that was ejected as a process is displayed. In the “status” column, “processing” and “waiting” are displayed from the top, indicating that the first processing is currently being processed. An image in which the user's card is ejected by a broken line from the first process is shown.

  On the right half screen of FIG. 83, 10,000 points that are points in the S units at the present time are displayed blinking.

  Next, the screen shown in FIG. 84 is displayed at the stage where the card has been ejected. In FIG. 84, the “status” column shows that the discharge of the card as the first process is “completed” and the discharge of the shared card as the second process is being processed next. . A state in which the shared card is ejected from the second process is indicated by an arrow. Next, the screen shown in FIG. 85 is displayed when the discharge of the shared card is completed.

  In the screen shown in FIG. 85, the user's own card has been discharged as the first process, and the shared card has been discharged as the second process. At present, his / her card is being reinserted. It is shown that there is. An image for inserting one's own card with an arrow is displayed at the third processing location.

  When the player reinserts his / her card into the CU, the screen shown in FIG. 86 is displayed. In FIG. 86, the message “Point sharing has been completed” is displayed, and it is shown that all of the first process, the second process, and the third process have been completed as the point sharing process status. Then, since the sharing of the points for 1000 points is completed, it is displayed that the points in the S units at the present time are 10000-1000 = 9000, which is 9000 points.

  Next, FIGS. 87 to 93 are diagrams of display screens by the display 312 when the control processing of the wagon service shown in FIG. 39 is executed.

  First, referring to FIG. 87, the display screen of FIG. 87 shows a state in which the player touches and selects and inputs the display item (icon) of “Wagon Service” displayed in the upper part of the left half of the screen. First of all, the message “Please select the type you want to order” is displayed, and as the wagon menu, “5 classic menu items”, “30 drinks”, “10 food items”, “sweets 20” 4 types of menus are displayed, and an “order status confirmation” icon is displayed.

  On the right half screen of FIG. 87, 1000 points are displayed as the current number of points in S units. The player selects a wagon menu that can be ordered within the range of 1000 points while considering that the current number of points is 1000 points. For example, when the player selects “30 drinks”, the screen shown in FIG. 88 is displayed. In FIG. 88, a message “Please select a product to order” is displayed, and six types of menus included in the drinks are shown. The number of points required for ordering each menu is shown. It is displayed. The player touches and selects and inputs an item to be ordered from the displayed menu while considering that the current number of points is 1000 points. An equilateral triangle icon and an inverted triangle icon are displayed on the right side where various menus on the left screen are displayed. When the player touches the equilateral triangle icon, the screen is scrolled down and the upper part of the screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the player touches the inverted triangle icon shown in FIG. 88, the screen is scrolled up and the lower portion of the screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 88, after the player selects a menu of coffee that requires 25 points, the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. Go back to the wagon menu display screen, select the “Food 10 items” menu in FIG. 87 and display the “Food” menu, and select “hamburger” that requires 100 points. The menu is selected, and further, the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. 89 is touched to return to the wagon menu display screen in FIG. 87 again. A case will be described in which the icon “20 sweets” is selected and input, and the player selects “ice” that requires 50 points from the sweets display screen.

  In that case, the screen shown in FIG. 89 is displayed next, and the details of the order product selected and input so far are displayed. In the order details, the name of the ordered product, the number of points consumed, and the quantity of the ordered product are displayed. In the case of FIG. 89, one hamburger with a consumption score of 25 is ordered, one coffee with a consumption score of 15 is ordered, and one ice with a consumption score of 10 is ordered. And it is displayed that the total consumption points are 50 points. In addition, an “add” icon is displayed in the quantity column of the order item details. When the player touches and inputs this additional icon, the quantity is incremented by “1” each time it is touched. The A “delete” icon is displayed on the right side of the quantity corresponding to each ordered prize. When the player touches this icon, the order for the corresponding product can be deleted. For example, touching “Delete” at the top deletes the hamburger order, touching the second “Delete” deletes the coffee order, and touching “Delete” the third “Ice” Orders are deleted.

  Further, an “add product” icon is displayed below the order item details, and when the player touches this, the player returns to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. It is possible to select an order item and place an additional order.

  Also, a “cancel” icon is shown below the order product details in FIG. 89, and the player can cancel all the order products ordered so far by touching this icon.

  Furthermore, an “order” icon is shown below the order item details, and when the player touches this, the order processing of the wagon service as shown in the order item details is executed. Become.

  When the player touches the “delete” icon corresponding to the “ice” order on the display screen of FIG. 89, the screen shown in FIG. 90 is displayed. FIG. 90 shows a state in which the order for “ice” has been canceled.

  On the other hand, when the player touches the “order” icon in FIG. 89, the screen shown in FIG. 91 is displayed. In the display screen of FIG. 91, an image being inquired about the ordered product is displayed. An arrow is displayed indicating that transmission / reception is being performed between 50 points, which is the total number of points consumed, and 1000 points on the S units at the current time, indicating that communication is in progress. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 92, an arrow indicating that communication is in progress is first displayed in the direction from “50” points to “1000” points of S units. The text “Inquiry” is displayed.

  After this display is made, an arrow is displayed in the direction from the “1000” points of the S units to the “50” points for consumption points, and the characters “inquiry” are displayed. Both of these displays are repeated a plurality of times. After the display, the screen of FIG. 93 is displayed next. In the screen shown in Fig. 93, the message "The order item has been received. The above consumption points have been deducted from the point that has been received." Is displayed, and the order item acceptance completion is displayed. And a total consumption score of “50” are displayed. In the right half of the screen, it is displayed that, as a result of the consumption of 50 points, the current score on S units is “950”.

  94 and 95 are display screens during addition display in the card insertion process shown in FIG. 35, and are the third display screen from the top of the display screens of the CU side display 312 shown in FIG. Another example is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 94, the left half of the screen shows game table information indicating the same contents as the display screen on the CU side in FIG. 76, although the screen configuration is different.

  On the right side of the screen in FIG. 94, a display is displayed in which the 1000 points that are points of the card inserted into the CU are all moving toward the S base from the CU to the S base.

  Then, at the stage where the point movement is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 95, a message “Pointer movement complete!” Is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the point column becomes 0 point. 1000 points are displayed as points in the S platform, and “1000” is displayed blinking.

  96 and 97 are display screens showing that a clear display is being performed in the card return process shown in FIG. First, referring to FIG. 96, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the current number of points in S units is 1000, and “1000” is blinked. Then, the state in which the point is moved from the S platform is displayed in the point display column, and the characters “moving the point” are displayed.

  Then, when the movement of the holding point is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 97, and the state that the holding point on the S platform side becomes 0 point is displayed, and 1000 points are displayed as the holding point. Then, “1000” is displayed blinking.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the number of points is managed on the CU side, there is no need to provide the management function on the S platform side, and the cost of the S platform is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed. In particular, the S platform has a short replacement cycle at the game hall in order to be able to provide a more interesting game as soon as possible, and tends to be replaced early in units of several months if it is one year or early. . In addition, as new stands are being developed one after another, which quickly incorporates rapidly changing player preferences, there is also a tendency for the base exchange cycle in the amusement hall to be accelerated.

  On the other hand, CUs are rarely replaced from the viewpoint of preference, and in general, equipment replacement is performed in response to a failure. It is what is used. If no failure occurs, replacement is not performed for several years.

  For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game arcade where the S units are introduced can be reduced by providing the management function of the holding points not on the S units side but on the CU side to suppress the cost of the S units.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an overall system for distributing authentication information including an authentication key and a unique ID (also referred to as SID) for ensuring security. Key management server 800 and host server 801, host server 801 and main control unit 323, main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, CU communication control unit 80 and S-unit communication control unit 82, payout control unit 31 and main control board 116, and the main control board 116 and the key management server 803 mutually authenticate using the authentication information, and determine whether or not the counterpart devices are appropriate. Then, communication is performed with each other on the condition that an authentication result that is appropriate is obtained. Distribution of authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 will be described below with reference to FIG.

  The SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 are transmitted from the key management server 800 of FIG. 98 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808. Specifically, referring to FIG. 98, key management server 800 stores the SID and authentication key of CU communication control unit 80 in association with each SID of main control unit 323. The card unit manufacturer stores the SID of the main control unit 323 in the EEPROM 808 as described above in the manufacturing stage of the card unit 3, and the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 corresponding to the SID of the main control unit 323, that is, already stored in the ROM 809. The SID of the CU communication control unit 80 and the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 are transmitted to the key management server 800 together with the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in the EEPROM 808. Then, the key management server 800 receives it and stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 transmitted in association with the transmitted SID of the main control unit 323. In this way, the key management server 800 constructs a database of authentication information for a pair consisting of the SID of the main control unit 323, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 corresponding to the SID, and the authentication key that is a common key.

  Thus, the SID of the main control unit 323 is authentication information itself, but is transmitted to the key management server 800 and identifies the SID and authentication key of the corresponding CU communication control unit 80 in the key management server 800. It is also used as authentication information specifying information for this purpose.

  When the power of the card unit 3 is turned on for the first time after the card unit 3 is installed in the amusement hall, the main control unit 323 sets the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in the EEPROM 808 as a key via the host server 801. It transmits to the management server 800. The key management server 800 searches for the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in association with the received SID of the main control unit 323, and searches for the SID and authentication of the searched CU communication control unit 80. The key is returned to the main control unit 323 via the host server 801. The main control unit 323 receives this, and stores the received SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 in the EEPROM 808. As a result, the same (pair) SID as the SID of the CU communication control unit 808 stored in the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the EEPROM 808 and the same (pair) as the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813. An authentication key is stored in EEPROM 808.

  Whether the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the ROM 809 is correct between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the EEPROM 808 The CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the CU communication control unit 80 is appropriate, and performs serial ID authentication. BB serial ID authentication is performed to determine whether or not the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in is correct and determine whether or not the main control unit 323 is correct. Further, whether or not a common authentication key is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is determined by using an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 and an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813. Device authentication is performed by using and determining.

  Next, the reason why the key management server 800 is used as the distribution source for distributing the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80, which is a part of the authentication information, to the main control unit 323 will be described.

  For example, referring to FIG. 5 described above, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the ROM 804 in the main control unit 323 as well as the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the ROM 809 during chip manufacture. When stored, the memory chip storing the SID of the same CU communication control unit 80 must be mounted on both the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and in the memory chip mounting process, A pair of memory chips must be mounted, and the mounting process becomes inconvenient.

  Therefore, for example, one of the pair authentication information, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID of the main control unit 323, and the authentication key are stored in the CU communication control unit 80, and the card unit 3 is manufactured. At the time of installation or when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, one authentication information stored in the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted to the main control unit 323. A method of storing the transmitted authentication information, that is, the SID of the main control unit 323, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, and the authentication key by the EEPROM 808 can be considered.

  However, in the case of this method, the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, so that there is a risk of leakage of the authentication information during that time, resulting in a security problem. In particular, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, as described above, the communication interface specification is disclosed, and the authentication information is transmitted according to the disclosed communication interface specification. Accordingly, there is a disadvantage that the risk of leakage of authentication information increases. Moreover, the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 are devices located in a local area as compared with, for example, the upper server 801 and the key management server 800, and the number thereof is also higher than that of the upper server 801 and the key management server 800. For this reason, there is a possibility that a person who attempts fraud easily allows an unauthorized person to intercept and eavesdrop on authentication information.

  Further, when the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, the following inconvenience occurs. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 is replaced with an illegally manufactured CU communication control unit 80, and then the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 stores the authentication information. In the case where an illegal act is performed, in the mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, it is not determined that there is any abnormality, and the CU communication control unit 80 is illegal. Can not be found. In other words, in the case of a system in which authentication information is supplied from one side that performs mutual authentication to the other side that performs mutual authentication, one side that performs mutual authentication is replaced with an unauthorized one, and then the fraudulent act is performed by supplying authentication information. This creates a security hole that allows you to forgive.

  In order to prevent the above inconveniences, a download method is adopted in which the authentication information stored in the upper server 801 is downloaded and stored in the main control unit 323.

  Next, a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 36 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the control mode for storing the game history data on the CU side and the S platform side shown in FIG. Here, differences from FIGS. 6, 40, and 111 will be mainly described.

  In the case of FIG. 5, the game history data is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 293 provided in the S stand 2S. However, in the modification shown in FIG. 99, the hall management computer 1 The game history data is cleared on the basis of a clear command transmitted from CU3 to CU3. Clearing of the game history data needs to be performed for each gaming machine installed in the game hall before the game hall starts business. Therefore, it is more convenient to clear the game history data by simultaneous delivery of the clear command signal from the hall management computer 1 to each CU 3 rather than the operation of the RAM clear switch installed for each S unit.

  When a hall attendant operates the hall management computer 1 or the clock function built in the hall management computer 1 reaches a predetermined time before the game hall opening time, the hall management computer 1 A clear command signal is simultaneously distributed to each CU3. The CU 3 that has received the clear command signal erases the storage in the S game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 by the action of the clear processing unit provided in the game history data management unit 391. As a result, the display of the S game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared). Further, a clear command signal is transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the S units 2S by the operation of the clear processing unit.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the clear command signal erases the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 by the operation of the clear processing unit, and the S game game history data. Of the storage data for 10 days in the storage unit, the oldest storage data is erased, and the remaining 9 days of storage data is shifted and stored one by one in the storage area of the old day. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 99, after the player leaves the seat, the identity of the player who has left the seat and the player who will play the next game is determined on the CU3 side. The C-ID, which is the player identification information of the player who has left the seat, is stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Then, when the player inserts a card into the CU 3 to play again in the S stand 2S that has left the seat, the information of the inserted card is read and the C-ID included in the inserted card information and the current player The C-ID of the player who has left the seat stored in the game history data storage unit is compared to determine whether or not they match. When it is determined that the two match, the same command is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 of the CU3 to the game history data management unit 291 of the S unit 2S, whereas when it is determined that they do not match The difference command is sent.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the same / difference command receives the C-ID and the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit in the current player game history data storage unit if they are the same command. Control to restore and store. On the other hand, when a difference command is received, control is performed to erase backup data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  In addition, when the S player 2S receives a card return notification from the game history data management unit 291 of the CU 3, A as a C-ID stored in the current player game history data storage unit and the game history data a Is stored in the backup data storage unit, and the C-ID and the game history data in the current player game history data storage unit are erased, so that the stored data in the current player game history data storage unit is stored in the backup data storage unit. Control to shift and store.

  99, as in FIG. 5 described above, the identity of the player is confirmed and stored in the current player game history data only when the C-ID of the membership card is read instead of the visitor card. And take over the game history.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing control of insertion processing in the modification shown in FIG. The control shown in FIG. 100 is obtained by changing a part of the control shown in FIG. 36. The same control steps are given the same step numbers, and differences will be mainly described here. Also in FIG. 100, solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and double-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 100, each step of S1, S2, S4 to S7, S20, and S21 is executed by the CU, and S22, S10, S12, S13, and S15 are executed by the S units.

  If it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, the control advances to S20, and the C-IDs of the card inserted this time and the card inserted last time are compared to determine whether or not they match. Next, in S21, control based on the determination result is transmitted to the S units. Specifically, the same command is transmitted to the S units in the case of a determination result that matches, and the different command is transmitted in the case of a determination result that does not match.

  In S units, whether or not the transmitted command is a coincidence command is determined in S22, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage unit) is stored in the current area (on the condition that they coincide with each other). Control is returned to the current player game history data storage unit) and the update of game history data is resumed (S12).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 100, the control of S14 shown in FIG. 36 is not executed.

  In this modification, instead of transmitting the same command as described above, the game history data a stored in the current area (current player game history data storage unit) of the data storage unit 392 is transferred to the gaming machine (S 2S). You may send it. In the gaming machine (S 2S) that has received the game history data a, the received game history data a is stored in the current area (current player game history data storage unit), and the game history data a is taken over to create a new game. Update history data. In this case, a backup area (backup data storage unit) is not required in the gaming machine (S 2S).

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like in the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the invention having the following configuration is disclosed.

A gaming system comprising a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a gaming device (card unit 3) connected so as to be communicable with the slot machine,
The slot machine is
First control means (main control board 116) for controlling the slot machine;
Second control means (LSI 117) communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means (CPU of the main control board 116) for determining an error that occurs during the control of the slot machine;
Abnormality notification control means (CPU of main control board 116, I / O port) for performing control to notify abnormality when the occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
Communicatively connected to the gaming device (connected by connectors 330, 220),
Including an abnormality determination means (authentication sequence of FIG. 25) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
Output means for outputting abnormality notification information for notifying that an abnormality has occurred when the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means (detecting an abnormality in the main control board 116) The payout control unit 31 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 from the S-unit communication control unit 82),
The gaming system according to claim 1, wherein the gaming device performs control for notifying abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  According to such a configuration, the first control means itself having a control function for notifying an abnormality when an error occurs during the control of the slot machine is determined by the second control means, and the first control means The first control having an abnormality notification control function when an abnormality occurs in order to perform control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming apparatus that the abnormality of the control means itself has occurred is output from the first control means to the gaming apparatus. Even when there is an abnormality in the means itself, the abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

  (2) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the S unit communication control unit 82 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 31 and use the information as it is. Although it transmits to CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.), and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (3) The authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. 24 to 32 are controls of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80, but the control of the authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. It may be performed by the payout control unit 31 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 of the slot machine 2S, and further, other gaming machines installed in the game hall (card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange) Apparatus).

  Also, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 32 may be performed, for example, between an island computer connected to the hall management computer 1 and a slot machine computer, and includes a main control unit and a communication control unit. In the Z counter, the communication control unit is connected to the prize management device, and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Furthermore, for example, a communication control unit connected to the medal saving management device may be provided in the card unit, and the business message sequence shown in FIG. 32 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit. .

  (4) The BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 27 is authentication using two types of SIDs, that is, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit, but one type of SID (for example, CU SID). ) May be used to authenticate the main control unit and the CU communication control unit. In this case, authentication that the same SID is stored is performed.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the score is displayed on the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the score is displayed on the S-side display 51. When displaying the number of points with the CU-side display, there is an advantage that the number of points can be displayed on the S units having no display unit by applying the CU in the present embodiment. On the other hand, when the score display section is provided on the S platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the S platform side. When the display control is performed on the S platform side, the number of points managed by the CU can be displayed on the score display unit by receiving information on the number of points to be displayed from the CU side. It becomes possible. Further, when the display control is performed on the S platform side as described above, there is an advantage that it is possible to display a score with a high decorative (production) value. When the display control is performed on the S platform side, the display of the score count is not performed based on the value of the score counter stored in the S platform itself, instead of receiving information on the number of scores to be displayed from the CU side. It is good also as what controls.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, when the points are subtracted by the wagon service or the like, as described based on FIG. 39 or the like, the subtraction is confirmed after waiting for a response from the S units. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of points stored on the CU side is sufficiently larger than the number of subtraction requests (for example, more than 30), the CU side alone does not wait for a response from the S units. Then, the point subtraction process may be performed, and then an operation instruction for a subtraction request may be transmitted to the S units.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, a command is transmitted from the CU to the S units and the S units respond to the response to the CU. Conversely, a command is transmitted from the S unit to the CU. Then, the communication form in which the CU returns a response to the S units in response thereto may be used.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control unit 31 is transmitted to the S unit communication control unit 82, and the command (operation instruction) is transmitted from the S unit communication control unit 82 to the CU. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is returned from the CU to the S unit communication control unit 82, and the S unit communication control unit 82 transmits the response (operation response) to the payout control unit 31.

  In this case, the payout control unit 31 executes retransmission of the command shown in FIG. That is, the payout control unit 31 retransmits the command to the S unit communication control unit 82 when the response cannot be received from the S unit communication control unit 82 for one second after the command is transmitted. Further, the payout control unit 31 also executes the transmission of the communication status request and the communication status confirmation shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b). That is, the payout control unit 31 transmits an operation instruction to the S-unit communication control unit 82 and then transmits a communication state request, and confirms the communication state based on the communication state response returned from the S-unit communication control unit 82. . When it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, an operation instruction is transmitted again, a communication state request is transmitted, and a communication state confirmation retry is executed.

  (8) Further, in the above-described embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and the S units periodically (for example, 200 ms), but instead, when the necessity of communication occurs, the CU Alternatively, communication may be performed by transmitting data from one of the S units to the other.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, an operation response including a rejection signal not complying with a request such as addition rejection ON, subtraction rejection ON, clear rejection ON, etc. is returned from the S units to the CU. Thus, it is determined that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the S units returning the response of the rejection ON operation, the operation response including the addition / subtraction number and the score data not complying with the request from the CU is returned to the CU, Thus, it may be determined whether the returned data (addition / subtraction number, score, etc.) is in accordance with the request, and thereby determine whether the request has been rejected.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, a case where a play stop state is detected when a power failure at the CU or a communication break between the CU and the S unit is detected has been described. It may be controlled so that the game can be continued on the S platform side. In that case, the addition subtraction number data generated along with the game continued from the occurrence of the communication interruption until the recovery from those abnormalities is started and stored on the S side, These data and point data may be transmitted to the CU to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, when the command from the CU is not transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the S units determine that the communication is disconnected by the processing of FIG. However, the communication interruption may be determined by the following method.

  The slot machine 2S is provided with a connection detector that detects whether or not the slot machine 2S and the card unit 3 are electrically connected. Referring to FIG. 3, CU communication control unit 80 and payout control unit 31 are connected by a signal line as described above. In addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from card unit 3 is applied. A connection detection signal line to be input to the slot machine 2S side is provided. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 31 are formed of the same cable, and the cable unit is disconnected or the connectors 330 and 220 are detached. Since the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V when the power is turned off, the connection detector detects this, and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 31. The payout control unit 31 determines that the disconnection of the cable, the disconnection of the connectors 330 and 220, and the power supply of the card unit 3 have been cut off due to the input of the detection signal.

  (12) In the processing of FIG. 33, the S units are programmed such that when the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received, the S units cannot reject the correction request. However, there is a case where a serious error that cannot correct the holding point or the like has occurred in the S units even though the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received. In consideration of such a severe error state, after transmitting a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON on the CU side, the content of the operation response transmitted from the S unit is checked, and the S side It is possible to determine whether or not the score of the mark has been corrected correctly, and when it has not been corrected, control for shifting to an error state may be performed.

  In other words, the CU determines in advance when it has determined that a slot machine (for example, S units) cannot still add points after receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON in FIG. Error control means for performing control to shift to a specified error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, a severe error notification is performed by the display 312 and a notification that a serious error has occurred is given to the hall management computer 1 to notify the error by the hall management computer 1. It may be possible to promote artificial responses by staff.

(13) On the S platform side, the number of additions may be counted as follows.
Counters A and B are provided as counters for counting the number of additions on the S side. First, the number of additions is counted by the counter A. When the transmission timing of the addition number is reached, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of addition is counted by the counter B. When the transmission timing of the addition number is reached, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter B is maintained, while the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the counter A counts the addition number. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used for counting the number of subtractions on the S platform side. Alternatively, it may be used for counting external output information.

  (14) The S units may transmit one piece of information after addition / subtraction of the addition number and the subtraction number to the CU, instead of sending the two information of the addition number and the subtraction number to the CU. That is, such information also constitutes “update information that can specify the change amount”.

  (15) The communication method is not limited to the command-response method described above. The S units may transmit points related information such as points to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, the S platform may transmit the score related information to the CU every time a predetermined amount of information is obtained, instead of transmitting the score related information at predetermined time intervals. For example, in the case of addition, it is conceivable that the addition number is transmitted to the CU every time one or two or more predetermined addition numbers are generated.

  (16) In the present embodiment, two counters, an addition number counter and a subtraction number count, are provided on the S side. However, instead of these two counters, a single addition / subtraction counter may be used which adds by increasing the score (occurrence of winnings, etc.) and subtracts by decreasing the score (setting the number of bets, etc.). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from the S units to the CU.

(17) This embodiment includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the slot machine and before receiving a response to the command, a process for reestablishing a communication connection with the slot machine In the process of re-establishing the communication connection, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has reached the slot machine based on the data transmitted from the slot machine side. The command transmission means for canceling the instruction for subtracting the point by the command when the arrival determination means determines that the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has arrived. Is sent to the slot machine, and the secondary holding point update means is a command for instructing the subtraction of the holding point. When a command to cancel the point subtraction instruction is received, if the point has already been subtracted based on the command to instruct the point subtraction, or the point has been subtracted due to a shortage of points. In any case, the score corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the score stored in the secondary score storage means.

  (18) In the present embodiment, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU by operating the return button 322. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting the end of the game from a management computer or the like.

(19) The CU and the S platform may be connected so as to be communicable by radio instead of wired connection.
(20) By providing the function of the payout control unit 31 on the main control board 116, the payout control unit 31 may not be provided in the slot machine 2S.

  (21) The payout control unit 31 performs control to stop the game when the score counter stored on the slot machine 2S side becomes zero. However, the payout control unit 31 may execute the control when the score counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the predetermined value can be designated and input in advance by the player using a predetermined operation switch of the slot machine. The payout control unit 31 sets the game prohibition state when the score counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. As a result, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of points has reached a predetermined number.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, the presentation unit 50 is provided on the slot machine 2S side and various displays are performed by the display 51. However, in the slot machine 2S that does not include the presentation unit 50, There may be. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during calculation display, ON during clear display is transmitted to the S unit 2S, Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display on the CU side is displayed.

  (23) In the saved medal sharing process shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the card B ejected for split transfer (shared medal sharing) to another person is used as a stock card stocked in the CU. Instead, the card B to be transferred to another person is inserted into the card insertion / discharge slot 309 from the outside of the CU, and the divided medals for divided transfer (shared medal) are recorded and discharged to the inserted card B. You may make it do. In that case, the sharing process status display screen shown in FIGS. 83 to 86 is shared between the first process of discharging the own card and the second process of discharging the shared card. Card insertion processing will be added.

  (24) In the saving medal sharing process shown in FIG. 78, the visitor card B is first inserted and the game is started. Instead, the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU. A game may be started. In that case, the transfer card B used for sharing the stored medals is taken out from the card stock part in the CU and discharged in association with the shared points, and the player is associated with the number of points at the end of the game. The card to be returned may be taken out from the card stock unit in the CU and discharged. In addition, after the game is started by inserting bills, the score taken at the time may be associated with the card taken out from the card stock portion when the score is generated by the occurrence of a prize. In that case, when the score changes with the game, the score associated with the card is similarly changed. Then, when a shared medal operation was performed, the number of points associated with the card was changed to the number of points for sharing, the card was ejected as a transfer card, and removed from the card stock section again You may make it match | combine the remainder which subtracted the shared score from the said score.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it is determined that the connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 34), and a communication disconnection request is transmitted by itself to disconnect the communication. When it is determined that the connection sequence is resumed after the determination, or the SQN backed up by the CU does not match the SQN transmitted from the S units, the reconnection shown in FIG. 33 instead of FIG. Run the connection sequence. However, in addition to them or in place of them, a signal (for example, recovery data) indicating that the communication connection has been disconnected from the S unit during the game (when not in standby) with the resumption of the connection sequence Etc.) may be transmitted to the CU, and the CU may execute the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 33 based on the signal.

  (26) In the split transfer (share medal sharing) process of points shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the split transfer is performed on the condition that it is determined that the current point is more than the predetermined number of points to be split and transferred. (Shared medal sharing) may be allowed. In the case of FIG. 77 and FIG. 78, for example, split transfer (share medal sharing) is permitted on the condition that it is determined that the current point is 200 points or more than the points to be split and transferred. In the case of FIG. 79, divisional transfer (shared medal savings) is performed on the condition that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral point (= 200) from the current point is 100 points or more than the point to be divided and transferred. Is acceptable.

  (27) In the process of split transfer of points (share medal sharing) shown in FIG. 77 and FIG. 79, the number of points in the game is changed to the card B until the card B is discharged after the card A is discharged. When the number of stored medals to be transferred is less than the number of points, the sharing of the points is canceled and the card B is not discharged.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the same units for the medal and the points are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the units may be different. For example, if the score “1” is converted into a stored medal, it may be “10”.

  (29) In FIG. 78, when a return operation at the end of the game is performed, the card stocked in the card stock section (stock card) is taken out and the stock card is associated with the score and discharged. However, instead, the game attendant may bring a new card, insert the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309, associate the number of points, and discharge the card. .

  (30) In the above embodiment, two types of cards, a membership card and a visitor card, are shown, but the type of card is not limited to this, and for example, only one type of visitor card may be used.

  (31) Instead of manually clearing the RAM by the RAM clear switch 293 shown in FIG. 5, a clock function may be provided so that a RAM clear signal is automatically output when the game hall business start time comes. As described above, the game history data is cleared by the automatically output RAM clear signal.

  (32) In the embodiment described above, in the game history data recovery process, control is performed to match the data on the CU side. However, since these game history data are information managed by the S units, Control may be performed so that the game history data on the CU side is updated on the basis of the game history data held on the S platform side regardless of whether or not the match is basically made. However, the total number of points, addition accumulation and subtraction accumulation data can be matched with the stored data on the CU side.

  (33) In the embodiment described above, the transition to the test hit mode is performed by inserting a test card into the CU. Instead of or in addition to this, a transition command from the upper server 801 or a Control may be performed so as to shift to the test hit mode by a remote control operation by a store clerk. The transition to the trial hit mode by such remote control operation can be shifted to the trial hit mode by remote control operation while waiting for a customer. Then, two types of test hit modes may be provided: a first test hit mode used as a non-business customer event in the game hall, and a second test hit mode for operation confirmation by an attendant or the like.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when there are no more points (or points) in the trial hit mode, a point addition command (or points addition command) is sent from the CU side to S units (or S units). The game is possible by adding the points (or adding the number of points) according to the above, but in the S units (or S units) without sending the point addition command (or point number addition command) from the CU side You may control so that a game can be continued even if there are no points (or points).

(34) The C-ID described above is composed of fixed code data that does not change, but instead, the C-ID read from the card changes dynamically according to the reading time. An ID code may be used. When the card is inserted into the CU and the CU reads the C-ID, the CU stores the C-ID together with the reading time, and the player is based on both the reading time and the C-ID data. You may comprise so that can be specified. For example, when the CU reads the C-ID, the current time T is input to the card, and the C-ID is encrypted with the T in the card E _T (C-ID), and the E _T (C-ID) And T are output as a pair. The CU decodes the E _T (C-ID) with T and extracts the C-ID by performing D _T (E _T (C-ID)).

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, a player is specified based on the C-ID and it is determined whether or not the same player is playing a game. The biometric information reading means for reading the biometric information such as the fingerprints and veins of the player is provided on the CU or S table, and the identity of the player is determined based on the biometric information reading means read by the biometric information reading means. Biometric authentication may be employed.

  (36) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored as the card is returned. Instead, the current player game history data storage unit is switched to the backup data storage unit and the backup data storage unit is switched to the current player game history data storage unit when the card is returned. You may control as follows. In that case, the storage data of the switched current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 51.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 5 and the like, the C-ID match determination is performed on the S platform side, but the match determination may be performed on the CU side. In that case, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit of the S unit 2S is transmitted to the CU side, and the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is received on the CU side that received the C-ID. , And the coincidence between the read C-ID and the C-ID transmitted from the S platform is determined. When the CU 3 determines that the C-IDs do not match, it transmits a clear command to the S unit 2S. The S unit 2S that has received the clear command erases the data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs match, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is returned to the current player game history data storage unit for the S unit 2S Command information for taking over the game history data and adding and updating new game history data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the S unit 2S. The command information may be code data such as takeover command information or the like, but backup game history data to be taken over, that is, game history data stored in the backup data storage unit of the S unit 2S is stored on the CU side. In addition, the backed up game history data may be transmitted to the S unit 2S as takeover command information. In that case, the backup data storage unit in the S units is not necessary.

  (38) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, 66, 67, 70, 71, 74, and 75, the determination of the identity of the C-ID is performed by the CU. Although what is performed on the S side is shown, this identity determination may be performed on the S platform side. In other words, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

It is possible to play with points and has a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that launches game media into the game area and adds points using the game value owned by the player. A slot machine where points are added according to the occurrence of
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means for storing the score;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player specifying information for specifying a player performing a game;
When communication is started by connecting to the gaming device, the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means is the same as the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means The same determination means for determining whether or not a player is identified,
A slot machine comprising: identical determination result transmission control means for performing control for transmitting a determination result by the same determination means from the communication unit to the gaming device.

  (39) In the above-described embodiment, the C-ID is included in the operation instruction and the operation response for transmission / reception. When different C-IDs are transmitted from the S units to the CU during the transmission / reception, it may be determined as an error, and control may be performed so that the addition number and the subtraction number are not updated on the CU side. When controlled in this way, there is a risk that the C-ID may be temporarily distorted due to noise during transmission and reception of commands and responses. In this case, for example, if the C-ID included in the operation response received on the CU side is different from the C-ID transmitted as a command, the CU side determines that there is an error and transmits the error. The addition / subtraction update control is not executed based on the addition number or subtraction number included in the operation response. As a result, when a C-ID that is not distorted by noise is transmitted from the S side in the next command and response transmission / reception, the operation response is determined even though it is determined that the C-ID matches and is normal. The number of points (total score) included in the CU and the total score stored by the CU are different from each other. In the above-described embodiment, in such a case, the number of points stored by the CU. The command for correcting to S is transmitted to the S units, and the number of points stored in the S units is rewritten to the stored number on the CU side. As a result, the score of S units will be rewritten to the previous old score that was updated based on the previous response where the C-ID goes wrong due to noise, and the correct score will be rewritten to the wrong score. The case will occur.

  In order to eliminate such an inconvenience, even if the C-ID included in the response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, it is not determined by only one response, but several times (for example, twice) It is desirable to control so as to determine that there is an abnormality only when the C-ID in the response subsequently goes wrong with the C-ID on the CU side. The following two methods are conceivable as specific methods for realizing this.

  First, as a first method, when the C-ID included in the first response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, the SQN is not added and updated at the time of transmission of the next command. Send. Then, in S units, as described based on FIG. 47, it is determined that the response has not reached the CU, and the previous transmission data is added to the addition number and the added addition number and the like are added to the next time. Control to transmit to the CU as a response is performed. In the CU, when the C-ID included in the next response matches the C-ID on the CU side, the CU determines that the C-ID is appropriate, and based on the addition number added with the previous transmission data. Update control of the number. As a result, it is possible to update to the correct number of points. On the other hand, if the C-ID included in the next response is also different from the C-ID on the CU side, the C-ID is determined to be abnormal because the C-ID is different twice in succession. Instead of updating the number of points based on the number of additions or subtractions included in the response, predetermined error processing control may be performed thereafter.

  The second method is to separately add and update on the CU side during C-ID mismatch, and when the correct C-ID is received, the separately added and updated data is converted into the total number of points, etc. Batch addition update.

The configuration of the modified example described above is summarized as follows.
The gaming device
A score storage means for storing the score;
Game device side identification information storage means for recording predetermined identification information;
Game device side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the game device side identification information storage means to the slot machine,
The slot machine is
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmitting means for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
Slot machine side identification information storage means for storing identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming apparatus side identification information transmission control means;
Slot machine side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the slot machine side identification information storage means to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Information receiving means for receiving the update information;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the main score storage means based on the update information;
Consistency to determine whether or not the identification information transmitted under the control of the slot machine side identification information transmission control means and the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus side identification information storage means are matched. A determination means;
An abnormality determination unit that performs an abnormality determination when it is determined that the alignment result is not continuously matched a predetermined number of times.
The point update means includes:
When the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination means is performed, the score is updated corresponding to the total amount of change of the score in the slot machine during the period determined as inconsistent by the alignment determination means. Don't do it,
When it is determined that the consistency determination unit is normal based on the identification information transmitted before the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination unit is performed, the alignment determination unit determines that there is a mismatch. The score is updated based on the total amount of change of the score in the slot machine during the period.

  According to such a configuration, even if identification information that is temporarily distorted due to noise or the like is received despite proper identification information being transmitted, it is erroneously determined as abnormal in the gaming device, and updated information is obtained. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by not updating the score based.

  (40) In the above-described embodiment, the game history data is re-totaled in the trial hit mode when the operation button icon such as the re-total button displayed on the display 312 is touched. Instead of or in addition, it may be controlled to re-total the game history data in the trial hit mode by detecting the opening of the front door 2b.

  (41) The contents of the foregoing embodiment can be applied not only to slot machines but also to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine type game machine is a player-owned valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or the like specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium (card). This is a gaming machine that includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that allows the number of balls to be used for gaming, and that plays gaming media by launching gaming media.

  In other words, with a pachinko machine type game machine, it is possible to play with points, the game medium is launched into the game area, and the game value owned by the player is increased. It is a gaming machine that includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that uses and adds points, and that points are added according to the occurrence of a prize.

  (42) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 4, the CU determines whether or not the number of points stored in the CU matches the number of points sent from the S units. In this case, a correction command for transmitting the number of points on the S platform to the number of points on the CU side is transmitted, but C-ID match / mismatch may be further added as a criterion for command transmission. For example, even if the number of points stored in the CU does not match the number of points sent from the S units, the correction command is not transmitted by itself, and the C-ID sent from the S unit is not changed. When the CU determines that it does not match the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command is transmitted. As a result, when an abnormality such as noise that causes the C-ID data to go wrong occurs, a correction command can be transmitted to correct the number of points on the S platform to a correct value.

  Further, when the CU determines that the C-ID sent from the S platform matches the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command may be transmitted. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in which the number of points on the S-side is out of order without the player being replaced, a correction command can be transmitted to correct the number of points on the S-side to the correct value. .

  (43) In the above embodiment, the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 erases the oldest stored data among the stored data for 10 days in the S game history data storage unit, and the remaining 9 days. One minute of stored data is shifted and stored one by one in the storage area of the old day. As a condition for executing the shift control of such S game history data, it is the time zone before the opening of the game hall. It may be added. That is, the shift control of the S game history data is executed on the condition that the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 is performed in a predetermined time zone before the game hall is opened.

  (44) In the above-described embodiment, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. In addition, the S LSIs 117 and the main control board are used. 116 may be executed between the payout control unit 31 and the S unit communication control unit 82.

  (45) In the modification described with reference to FIG. 99, the clear command transmitted from the hall management computer 1 is input to the CU 3. Instead of or in addition to this, a clear switch is provided to the CU 3. It is also possible to perform the process of clearing the game history data described above by operating the clear switch. Further, the game history data may be cleared by a remote control operation. Specifically, when the attendant of the game hall performs a clear operation by pointing the remote control at the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the CU3, the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives the operation signal (infrared ray) and clears the game history data. Do.

  (46) The command transmission interval of the CU may be changeable. For example, it is conceivable that the command transmission interval can be finely changed and set by operating a transmission interval switching switch provided in the CU. In this case, the CU is provided with a table storing a plurality of types of transmission interval data in advance, and the transmission interval corresponding to the switch operation is selected from the table. Alternatively, the CU may be able to switch the transmission interval in response to a switching command from the management computer. The transmission interval may be switched at the time of mutual authentication when communication is started between the CU and the S units, for example.

  (47) In the present embodiment, “the game value can be started by setting the number of bets for one game using the game value and displayed on a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of symbols. A slot machine in which one game is completed by deriving a result, and a winning can be generated according to a combination of symbols derived and displayed on a predetermined winning line as a display result of the variable display device, Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to allow the derivation of the winning symbol combination that generates the winnings on the winning line before the display result is derived to the variable display device; and the variable display device Derivation operation receiving means for receiving an operation for deriving a display result, and the variable display device according to the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation received by the derivation operation reception means Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result, and a predetermined amount when a combination of award-winning symbols with game value is derived on the winning line among a combination of winning symbols for generating a winning A slot machine including a game value providing means for providing a player with a game value of “.”

  (48) In the slot machine, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is determined in advance, and in addition, the winning does not occur continuously in a short period of time unlike a pachinko gaming machine. Occur. Also, the number of bets is set to any one of 1-3, for example. For this reason, as long as an operation response is transmitted at a time interval of 200 ms, normally, the data of the addition number included in the operation response matches the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination. Similarly, the subtraction data included in the motion response matches any of the betting numbers. For example, if the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is 3, 5, 10, or 15, the added number included in the action response is any one of them. Similarly, if the number of bets that can be set is any one of 1, 2, and 3, the subtraction data included in the action response is any one of 1 to 3.

  Therefore, when the addition number and the subtraction number included in the operation response notified to the CU are other than predetermined values, the CU determines that an error has occurred and notifies the error, or A command instructing prohibition of the game may be sent to the S units.

  Furthermore, since the subtraction number data is generated by setting the bet amount when starting one game and the addition number data is generated by winning when one game is completed, normally, unless a retry or the like occurs, One of the addition number and the subtraction number included in one operation response is zero.

  Therefore, if either the addition number or the subtraction number included in the operation response notified to the CU is not 0, the CU determines that an error has occurred if the operation response is not retry data or the like. Then, an error notification or a command for instructing prohibition of the game may be sent to the S units.

  Furthermore, in the slot machine 2S, one game regulation time is set as the minimum time required to digest one game. In the present embodiment, for example, it is 4.1 seconds. For this reason, normally, a plurality of operation responses including addition numbers or subtraction numbers exceeding 0 are not transmitted to the CU. In addition, normally, an operation response including a subtraction number exceeding 0 is transmitted to the CU during one game regulation period after an operation response including a subtraction number exceeding 0 is transmitted to the CU. Absent. Similarly, normally, after an action response including an addition number exceeding 0 is transmitted to the CU, an operation response including an addition number exceeding 0 is further transmitted to the CU during one game regulation period. There is no. Therefore, when these events occur, the CU determines that an error has occurred and sends an error notification or a command to prohibit the game to the S units. Good.

  (49) In the present embodiment, when a winning occurs, the data of the addition number is generated and transmitted to the CU as an operation response. However, when the replay winning is generated, the number of points increased is 0, and in the next game, the same bet number as the game in which the previous replay winning has occurred is automatically set without reducing the points. . Therefore, the operation response at the time of replay winning is “(a) The number of additions at the time of replay winning is 0, and the number of subtractions associated with the setting of the betting amount in the next game where the replay winning has occurred is also 0”, “( b) The number added at the time of replay winning is the betting number of the game that generated the replay winning, and the subtraction number associated with the setting of the betting amount in the next game where the replay winning is generated is also the same as the betting number. There are two possible patterns. In any case, the replay winning may be one of the external output information. That is, a replay winning may be added as one of a plurality of types of external output information so that the total number of replay winning times can be stored in the CU. In addition to the replay winning combination, all winning combinations are targeted for external output information, and whenever a winning combination by any winning combination occurs, the counter corresponding to the winning combination is updated on the S units and includes the data. The operation response may be transmitted to the CU.

  (50) Once the variable display device starts rotating, the slot machine cannot finish one game unless the rotation is stopped. For this reason, it is impossible to interrupt the game at an arbitrary timing of the game stop transmitted from the CU side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, when a prohibition request (see FIG. 42) for returning a game card is generated while the variable display device is rotating, the final score is obtained after the game ends. We decided to accept the return of the game card after it was confirmed.

  However, in such a configuration, the game card cannot be returned unless the player performs a stop operation. Therefore, when a game card return operation is detected while the reel is rotating, it is conceivable that a message prompting a stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like on the liquid crystal display device or the CU on the display 312 or the like. Alternatively, when a prohibition request for returning a gaming card occurs while the variable display device is rotating, a card return during the game is made by returning a response indicating that the prohibition request is rejected from the S units to the CU. May not be accepted. Alternatively, the CU may determine whether or not the game is being executed at the stage where the card return operation is detected, and may not accept the card return operation when the game is being executed. Whether or not the game is being executed can be determined based on “reel rotation start” and “reel rotation stop” which are external output information transmitted from the S units.

  (51) In the slot machine 2S, for example, a lottery effect as to whether or not to shift to a certain service-like gaming state such as AT is performed on the liquid crystal display device during the game, and after the game ends, You may display the result of a lottery effect after performing the lottery effect for a predetermined period. However, when such a lottery effect is performed, a card return operation may be performed after the end of one game and before the result of the lottery effect is displayed. In such a case, the lottery effect may be interrupted to determine the current score and return the card.

  (52) In the present embodiment, the number of points held = 0 is detected on the S side, and the bet number operation is disabled. However, the remaining number of points to be detected = 0 is an example. For example, in the gaming state where only the bet number = 3 is valid, the S units detect that the number of points has become less than 3, and control the bet number operation invalid state. Similarly, in the gaming state where only the bet number = 2 is valid, the S units detect that the number of points has become less than 2 and control the bet number operation invalid state. In short, the S units compare the minimum required bet number and the number of points in the current gaming state, and if the former is less than the latter, control is made to the bet number operation invalid state.

  When such control is performed, in addition to the case where the remaining number of points is 0, for example, when the remaining number is a fraction such as 1 or 2, the bet number operation may be invalidated. When a player performs an operation to finish a game, it is necessary to return a game card with a fraction recorded so as not to be valuable. In particular, if a player does not play a game using a card in the first place, and has played a game by putting cash into the CU exclusively, he / she has to bother to issue a new valueless game card, It is uneconomical. Therefore, when a game using cash is performed and the player has a score less than a predetermined value when the player returns the card, the CU prints a fraction instead of a normal game card. The paper may be printed out.

  (53) The slot machine 2S according to the present embodiment wins by winning the internal lottery in advance and stopping the winning symbol by so-called pressing. However, instead of such a slot machine, a slot machine in which the result according to the internal lottery is always displayed in a stop on the variable display device may be used. In this case, it may be a slot machine in which each reel automatically stops one after another after a predetermined time without performing a stop operation, or at any timing while a stop operation button is provided for each reel. A slot machine that always stops and displays the result according to the internal lottery even when the stop operation is performed may be used.

  In this way, when a slot machine that always stops and displays the result according to the internal lottery is adopted, the number of points to be added is determined based on the presence / absence of a win and the win when the internal lottery is executed. . Therefore, for example, when the internal lottery is executed when a reel start operation is detected, the number of points subtracted by the bet number setting at the time of the start operation and the number of points added according to the winning are calculated. It will be confirmed. In such a case, the S units may send an addition number corresponding to the winning combination when transmitting the subtraction number associated with the betting number setting as the operation response. That is, the data of the addition number may be transmitted at an earlier stage than the actual winning timing.

  Furthermore, the CU may discharge a predetermined ticket or token that can specify the points, instead of discharging (returning) the card in accordance with the game end operation.

(54) The variable display device may be constituted by a liquid crystal display device instead of a rotating cylinder.
(55) In the present embodiment, the number of points is displayed on both the indicator 312 provided on the CU side and the indicator 51 provided on the S platform side, but only on one of them. May be. When displaying the number of points with the CU-side display, there is an advantage that the number of points can be displayed on the S units having no display unit by applying the CU in the present embodiment. On the other hand, when displaying the number of points on the S platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the S platform side. When the display control is performed on the S platform side, the display unit 51 can display the number of points managed by the CU by receiving information on the number of points to be displayed from the CU side. It becomes. Further, when the display control is performed on the S platform side as described above, there is an advantage that it is possible to display a score with a high decorative (production) value. When the display control is performed on the S platform side, the display of the score count is not performed based on the value of the score counter stored in the S platform itself, instead of receiving information on the number of scores to be displayed from the CU side. It is good also as what controls.

  (56) In the above-described embodiment, when the points are subtracted by the wagon service or the like, as described with reference to FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the number of points stored on the CU side is sufficiently larger than the number of subtraction requests (for example, 30 or more), the CU side alone does not wait for a response from the S units. A point subtraction process may be performed, and thereafter a subtraction request operation instruction may be transmitted to the S units.

  (57) In the above-described embodiment, a command is transmitted from the CU to the S units and the S units respond to the response to the CU. Conversely, a command is transmitted from the S unit to the CU. Then, the communication form in which the CU returns a response to the S units in response thereto may be used.

  (58) In this embodiment, the CU retransmits the command at most twice if the response is not received within one second after the command is transmitted, and if there is still no response, the CU determines that there is a communication error and leaves for 5 seconds. The connection sequence is resumed later (see FIG. 21). For this reason, if there is no response within 3 seconds from the transmission of the first command, the connection sequence is resumed. However, instead of this, a longer time until the CU determines that the communication is abnormal from the first command transmission, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, 20 seconds) in which a plurality of games can proceed on the S side. 30 seconds). In this case, for example, taking FIG. 46 as an example, after receiving the operation response from the S units, the CU does not retransmit the command twice, but three times before the predetermined time elapses. If there is, it will be repeated. In this case, the command retransmission interval may be 200 ms or a longer time interval, or the command retransmission may be performed after a certain time has elapsed since the start of retransmission. The interval may be changed (for example, the retransmission interval may be lengthened in the second half of the former). Then, when the retransmission command finally reaches the S units before the predetermined time elapses, an operation response indicating the amount of change in the points for a plurality of games that has progressed until then is transmitted from the S units to the CU. Become.

  (59) In the above-described embodiment, the display area 51a is provided on the slot machine 2S side. Thus, the display area 51a displays information related to points, but the display to display information related to points. The slot machine 2S may not include the area 51a. In that case, even if a command including operation instructions such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during calculation display, ON during clear display is transmitted to the slot machine 2S, the slot machine 2S Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display on the CU side is displayed.

  (60) In the process of split transfer of points (sharing points) shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the split transfer is performed on the condition that it is determined that the current points are more than a predetermined number of points to be split and transferred. (Share point sharing) may be allowed. In the case of FIG. 77 and FIG. 78, for example, divisional transfer (point sharing) is permitted on the condition that it is determined that the current point is 200 or more than the points to be divided and transferred. In addition, in the case of FIG. 79, divided transfer (share points sharing) on condition that it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral points (= 200) from the current score is 100 points or more than the points to be divided and transferred. Is acceptable.

  (61) When there is a game interruption or card return operation, S does not wait for the wait time to elapse, but on the condition that all the reels that are rotating are stopped and the display result and the number of points are fixed. A game completion ON response may be returned from the stand to the CU.

  (62) The S units further transmit various information of the “game table state” shown in FIG. 15 as the external output information, and the CU accumulates and stores them in the same manner as other external output information. You may do it.

  (63) In the test hit mode, any game state may be selected. For example, the S units store in advance the “big bonus state”, “regular bonus state”, “RT state”, “AT state”, and other “normal gaming state” as the gaming state in the test hit mode. In addition, based on the selection operation of the staff in the trial hit mode, control is performed to switch to any one of the gaming states.

  (64) The S unit does not erase the game history in the trial hit mode at the end of the trial hit mode, but stores the game history in the trial hit mode in the storage area for the trial hit mode (memory mounted on the S unit). You may make it leave.

  (65) In the above-described embodiment, a slot machine that does not require any physical game medium such as a medal in the game has been described as an example of the point-slot type slot machine. When such a slot machine is employed, a game medium is not required, and therefore it is not necessary to provide a game medium transport path or a game medium reservoir in the slot machine. As a result, the structure of the slot machine can be simplified, and the slot machine can be reduced in size or cost.

  However, in place of such a slot machine, a slot machine that adopts a scoring system and updates the scoring in conjunction with moving a game medium such as a medal or game ball in a predetermined direction is adopted. It is also possible to do.

  For example, a circulation path is provided for enclosing a large number of game media in the slot machine and circulating the enclosed game media in a predetermined direction. In addition, you may provide the discharge | emission / input part which can discharge | emit / input game media as needed in the predetermined location of the circulation path.

  When the point addition condition is satisfied, the slot machine adds the number of game media corresponding to the number of points to be added from the plurality of game media in the circulation path to the second from the predetermined first location in the circulation path. While moving to a location, the stored score is added and updated, and a response command for adding the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU adds and updates the stored number of points.

  Further, when the score subtraction condition is satisfied, the slot machine, from among the plurality of game media in the circulation path, the number of game media corresponding to the number of score points to be subtracted from the second location in the circulation path. While moving to one location, the stored score is subtracted and updated, and a response command for subtracting the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU subtracts and updates the stored number of points.

  Even when the subtraction condition is satisfied, the game medium may be moved from the first location to the second location as in the case where the addition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the game medium may be moved only when the addition condition is satisfied, or the game medium may be moved only when the subtraction condition is satisfied.

  Also, the game medium moving between the first location and the second location can be seen through in order for the player to recognize that the points have been updated in response to the movement of the game media. It is desirable to provide the see-through part at a predetermined position on the front side of the slot machine.

  Further, if a plurality of movement paths for moving the game medium are provided between the first place and the second place, the possession to be updated when the addition condition or the subtraction condition is satisfied once. Game media corresponding to the number of points updated when the number of points updated is large (for example, when the number of payouts based on winnings is large, when the number of additions based on a lending command is large, or when the number of bets is a MAX value) Can be moved quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable operation such that the movement of the game medium continues in spite of the end of the update display of the points.

  Further, if the first place and the second place are arranged so that the upper part and the lower part in the vertical direction are in a relationship, the game medium is naturally moved from the first place to the second place by its own weight. It can be dropped, and the moving mechanism of the game medium can be simplified. In this case, it is assumed that the game medium is allowed to flow from the first location to the first location in both addition and subtraction update of the points. Alternatively, the game medium may be allowed to flow from the first location to the first location only in one of the addition and subtraction update of the score. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide a flow-down path for addition update of the holding point and a flow-down path for update of the subtraction of the holding point separately, and provide a perspective window for addition update visual recognition and a perspective window for subtraction update visual recognition, respectively. Good.

  In particular, when a game ball is used as the game medium, the game medium can be circulated more smoothly than when a medal is used because the game medium is spherical. As the game ball, it is conceivable to adopt a pachinko ball that is normally used in a game store. In this case, for example, if the pachinko ball 5 balls corresponds to the value of one medal of the slot machine (value of the score = 1), when the score is updated, the updated score 5 Double pachinko balls will be moved between the first location and the second location. A pachinko ball visually recognized through a see-through window provided between the first location and the second location is a “show ball” exclusively used to indicate to the player that the points have been updated. Will function as.

  In the above example, it has been explained that a slot machine that updates a score in conjunction with moving a game medium in a predetermined direction while adopting a score system is used. Instead of a game medium such as a ball, a dedicated object (for example, a spherical object made of a material different from a general pachinko ball) may be employed for updating the holding points in conjunction with the movement.

  Furthermore, in the above example, when the score is updated in conjunction with the movement of the game medium, the score is updated and the game medium is moved when the winning occurs or the setting of the betting number is confirmed. Alternatively, a corresponding number of game media may be moved when one point is updated.

  Alternatively, conversely, the game medium may be moved first, and the score may be updated each time the movement of the game medium is detected. For example, when the number of points = 1 per game medium corresponds, the following configuration is made. In other words, a detection means for detecting the moved game medium is provided in the slot machine, and the movement of the game medium corresponding to the number of points to be updated is started when a winning occurs or the betting number setting is confirmed. Each time one of the game media is detected by the detecting means, one point is updated.

  (66) In the above embodiment, even when the player leaves the seat during the game, the C-ID of the member card inserted into the CU 3 before leaving and the member card inserted into the CU 3 after that. The player's game history data is restored by checking the C-ID. Such restoration of game history data is permitted only when the card inserted before leaving the seat is a membership card, and is not allowed when the card inserted before leaving is a visitor card. May be. Or conversely, even in the case of a visitor card, the game history data may be restored based on the C-ID.

  (67) The above embodiment has been described by taking as an example a slot machine in which when the reel starts to rotate, the reel continues to rotate unless a stop operation is detected, and the reel does not automatically stop. However, a slot machine that automatically stops the rotation of the reel when a stop operation is not detected even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the rotation of the reel may be adopted. In this case, when the reels are rotating at the stage of receiving the prohibition request command from the CU, the S unit detects that the reels are stopped after the time until the reels automatically stop or that the reels are stopped. After the detection, a game completion ON response is transmitted to the CU as an operation response.

  (68) The S units may adopt a configuration in which setting information is transmitted from the S units to the CU. In this case, the CU may adopt a configuration in which the received setting information is transmitted to an external management apparatus such as the hall management computer 1. As a result, the setting information of each S units can be managed in the management apparatus.

  As setting information, the setting value of the winning probability set by operating S setting parts can be illustrated, for example. The S payout rate changes according to the winning probability corresponding to the set value when the internal lottery is performed. The set value has, for example, six stages 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rates being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In the set values 1 to 6, the winning probability of each winning combination is determined.

  Alternatively, as the setting information, effect information can be exemplified. The effect information is, for example, the type of character displayed on the display screen. More specifically, the type of character that appears on the display screen during AT.

  The S units include this type of setting information in one of the multiple types of responses described in the above embodiment, and transmit it to the CU. For example, when it is included in the recovery response, the setting information is transmitted from the S units to the CU every time recovery occurs. Alternatively, when it is included in the operation response, repeated setting information is transmitted from the S units to the CU during the game.

  Or you may further provide the command which requests | requires transmission of setting information, and the message | telegram of the response which responds to this. In this case, when the S machine receives a command requesting transmission of setting information, the S machine transmits a response including the setting information to the CU. Further, the CU may be configured to transmit a command for requesting transmission of setting information to the S units when receiving a setting information transmission request from an external management device (for example, the hall management computer 1). . As a command at this time, a dedicated command for requesting setting information may be adopted, but an operation instruction command or the like may be used. For example, when an operation instruction command is used, data indicating whether or not setting information is requested may be added to the operation instruction command.

  In the following, effects obtained from various means included in the present embodiment and combinations of various means are listed.

(1-1) A slot machine (slot machine 2S) that can be played with points and the points are added in accordance with the occurrence of winnings, and the player's own game value (prepaid balance, number of shares, or A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) connected to the slot machine so as to be communicable (connecting wiring with connectors 330 and 220),
The slot machine is
Specific means (a microcomputer for slot machine control, an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter) for identifying the amount of change (addition number, subtraction number) in accordance with the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmission means (payout control unit 31) for transmitting update information (operation response including addition number and subtraction number) that can specify the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “number of points”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) that updates the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the slot machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the slot machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, slot machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the slot machine. is there.

(1-2) The slot machine
Sub-point storage means (point counter) for storing points;
Sub-point update means (payout control unit 31) for updating the points stored in the sub-point storage means according to the amount of change,
While the slot machine performs game control based on the points stored in the sub-point storage means (betting number setting prohibition when the point counter becomes 0),
The gaming device, when a signal for requesting the end of the game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, holds the points stored in the main holding point storage means as the points at the end of the game. Point determination means (main control unit 323; FIG. 42) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are fixed on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point fixing function on the slot machine side, and the cost of the slot machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored by the main point storage means;
Instruction information transmitting means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the slot machine,
The slot machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payout control unit 31) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmission means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means indicates the amount of change (current holding point related information) from the previous reception of the information to the current reception. Update information is transmitted (values of the addition number counter and the subtraction number counter in FIG. 4, FIG. 40).

  According to such a configuration, in accordance with an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change based on the previous transmission time of the update information is transmitted from the slot machine to the gaming device one by one. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmitting means transmits the score (value of the score counter) stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the gaming device (value of the score counter in FIG. 4, FIG. 40),
The gaming device is:
Determination means for determining the consistency between the score stored in the main score storage means and the score stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 4; determining the match of the number of scores);
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing are performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (point correction ON) And the communication start request including the score data stored in the CU is transmitted to the S units, and the storage of the score number of the S units is corrected to match the score of the CU).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the slot machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(1-5) The instruction information transmission means has the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means when the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent. Send correction information (communication start request including the point correction ON and the number of points) to the point to the slot machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the slot machine (transmission of a communication start request including the point correction ON and the number of points to S units),
The slot machine corrects the score stored in the auxiliary score storage unit based on the correction information (a payout control unit 31; corrects the score according to the score correction ON and the score) )including.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming machine side and the slot machine side are caused by an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to fraud and other causes. Even when the stored score does not match, the score stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

  (1-6) The slot machine determines the remaining number of points necessary for continuing the game based on the remaining points stored in the sub-point storage unit (payout control). Part 31, FIG. 41).

  According to such a configuration, since the transmission of update information is not in time at the time of determination, the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the number of points stored on the slot machine side) Even if there is a gap between them, the determination based on the actual score can be made.

(1-7) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing game prohibition to the slot machine (operation instruction in FIG. 44 (with prohibition request)),
When the slot machine receives the information for instructing the prohibition of the game, the game prohibiting means for prohibiting the game by the points (the payout control unit 31 prohibits the BET (betting number setting)). including.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to control the prohibition of gaming by the slot machine on the gaming device side.

(1-8) The instruction information transmission unit transmits information for instructing to set the value of the score stored in the auxiliary score storage unit to an initial value to the slot machine (FIG. 42, (Operation instruction in FIG. 73 (with clear request)),
In the slot machine, the auxiliary holding point storage means stores the information based on the fact that the instruction to set the value of the holding point stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means to the initial value is received. 42, FIG. 73 (the payout control unit 31 initializes the value of the score counter to 0) for initializing the score value.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored in the slot machine can be instructed to be initialized on the gaming device side.

(1-9) Provided with a connecting portion (connector 330) for connecting to a slot machine (slot machine 2S) that can be played with points and that is awarded in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, A gaming device (card unit 3) for adding points using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of possessions, or number of savings),
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing the “number of score”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving update information from the slot machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the slot machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the slot machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, slot machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the slot machine. is there.

  (1-10) A score for determining the score stored in the score storage means as the score at the end of the game when a signal requesting the end of the game (operation signal of the return button 322) is input The confirmation means (main control unit 323; FIG. 42) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are fixed on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point fixing function on the slot machine side, and the cost of the slot machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-11) When a score updated on the slot machine side is received from the slot machine in response to use in a game and occurrence of a prize, the received score and the score storage means Including determination means for determining consistency with the stored score (FIG. 4; determining the match of the score);
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing are performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (point correction ON) And the communication start request including the score data stored in the CU is transmitted to the S units, and the storage of the score number of the S units is corrected to match the score of the CU).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the slot machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

  (1-12) The correction information for correcting the score stored in the slot machine to the score stored in the score storage means when the determination means determines that there is a mismatch. Correction information transmitting means for transmitting to the slot machine (transmitting of the point correction ON and the number of points) is included.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming machine side and the slot machine side are caused by an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to fraud and other causes. Even when the stored score does not match, the score stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(2-1) A connecting portion (connector 220) for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using the gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and one game can be started by setting the number of bets by the number of points and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed and points are added according to the winnings generated by the display result of the variable display device,
Specific means (game control microcomputer, payout control microcomputer, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change (addition number, subtraction number) according to the setting of the bet number and the occurrence of winnings; ,
Information transmission means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including addition number and subtraction number) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
A score storage means (score counter) for storing the score;
Information for instructing subtraction of points (operation instruction including a subtraction request in FIG. 39), and use of the game value with respect to points stored in the game device on the game device side In conjunction with the addition of the remaining points, information for instructing addition of the points transmitted from the gaming device side (operation instruction including the presence of addition request in FIGS. 37 and 38) is received. Instruction information receiving means (LSI 117);
A score update means (LSI 117, FIG. 4) for updating the score stored in the score storage means in accordance with the amount of change and adding and updating in accordance with information for instructing the addition of the score ,
When the information for instructing the subtraction of the score is received, the score determination means for determining whether or not the score having the size indicated by the information is stored in the score storage means (FIG. 39). LSI117),
The information transmitting means accepts a score subtraction acceptance response when the score determining means determines that the score having the magnitude indicated by the information to be subtracted is stored in the score storage means (FIG. 39; Subtraction of the points instructed to be subtracted by the information from the points stored on the gaming device side by transmitting a response to the gaming device including the subtraction rejection OFF) to the gaming device. (FIG. 39; the subtraction of the score is determined after waiting for an action response).

  According to such a configuration, since the amount of change in the score is transmitted from the slot machine, the score management can be performed on the gaming device side. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the slot machine side, and the cost of the slot machine can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, slot machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the slot machine. is there.

  In addition, the point addition on the slot machine side is promptly performed in response to a request for adding points using gaming value. On the other hand, if a request for subtracting points occurs, it depends on the game situation immediately after that. Since there is a possibility that the score is insufficient for the subtraction request, the score is subtracted on the gaming device side on the condition that a consent response is returned. As a result, when a request for adding points or a request for subtracting points based on the game value is generated, it is possible to quickly and reliably perform processing according to those requests.

  (2-2) When the score update means receives the information for canceling the score subtraction instruction (FIG. 69; communication start request), the score update means corrects the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 69).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the subtraction instruction arrives at the slot machine side, there are cases where the points stored on the slot machine side are less than the subtraction instruction due to game progress. At this time, if it is unknown on the gaming device side whether or not the slot machine has refused the subtraction instruction due to communication failure or the like, if the subtraction is confirmed, the score on the slot machine side will be negative Inconvenience arises. However, at this time, the slot machine corrects the score stored in the score storage means by receiving information for canceling the score subtraction instruction. Can prevent inconvenience.

  (2-3) The information transmission means sends a subtraction rejection response for the game when it is determined by the score determination means that a score of the size instructed to be subtracted is not stored in the score storage means. It transmits to the device (FIG. 53; subtraction rejection ON operation response).

  According to such a configuration, when the subtraction instruction arrives at the slot machine side, if the score stored on the slot machine side is less than the subtraction instruction due to game progress, The machine can ask the gaming device to cancel the subtraction.

  (2-4) game control means for performing game control based on the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 41; if the score counter becomes 0, the bet number operation is disabled).

  According to such a configuration, since the game control in the slot machine is performed based on the points stored in the slot machine itself, it is compared with the case where the game control is performed based on the points stored in the gaming device. Thus, the game control can be performed in real time in accordance with the change of the points.

(2-5) The instruction information receiving means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information of the points from the gaming device (LSI 117),
Each time the information transmission means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means indicates the amount of change (current holding point related information) from the previous reception of the information to the current reception. Update information is transmitted (FIG. 4; addition number counter and subtraction number counter).

  According to such a configuration, in accordance with an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change based on the previous transmission time of the update information is transmitted from the slot machine to the gaming device one by one. . For this reason, in the gaming apparatus, it is possible to manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

  (2-6) Receiving correction information (correction instruction command) for correcting the score (value of the score counter) stored in the score storage means to the score stored in the gaming device In this case, it includes a point correction unit (LSI 117; corrects the number of points according to the correction instruction command) for correcting the point stored in the point storage unit based on the correction information.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming machine side and the slot machine side are caused by an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to fraud and other causes. Even when the stored score does not match, the score stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

  (2-7) The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at a time interval (200 ms) shorter than a predetermined one game regulation time (4.1 s) (FIG. 20).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at intervals shorter than the one game restriction time, the change amount of the score notified by the update information is sequentially transmitted between the one game. . As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

  (2-8) including a remaining score determination means (LSI 117, FIG. 41) for determining the presence or absence of the remaining score necessary for continuing the game based on the score stored in the subsidiary score storage means .

  According to such a configuration, since the transmission of update information is not in time at the time of determination, there is a difference between the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the points stored on the slot machine side). Even if there is a gap between them, the determination based on the actual score can be made.

  (2-9) When receiving information for instructing game prohibition (operation instruction in FIG. 44 (with prohibition request)), game prohibition means (LSI 117 and LSI 117) for entering a game prohibition state in which a new game cannot be started The main control board 116 is controlled to be in the bet number operation invalid state, and includes “BET prohibited” in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to enter a game prohibition state in which a new game cannot be started in response to a game prohibition instruction from the gaming apparatus side.

  (2-10) Information for instructing to set the value of the score stored in the score storage means to the initial value is received from the gaming device (the operation instruction (clear request in FIGS. 42 and 73) Yes) based on the result, the score initializing means (FIG. 42, FIG. 73 (LSI 117 sets the value of the score counter to 0). Initialization).

  According to such a configuration, the points stored in the slot machine can be initialized in response to an instruction from the gaming apparatus side.

(2-11) for storing the amount of change specified by the update information transmitted by the information transmission unit and storing the amount of change specified by the update information transmitted by the information transmission unit one time before Two change amount storage means (FIG. 4; an addition number counter for storing the current addition number, a subtraction number counter for counting the current subtraction number, a region for storing the previous addition number as previous holding point related information, and a previous subtraction number are stored. Area) and
And arrival determination means (LSI 117, FIG. 47) for determining arrival of the update information to the gaming device based on predetermined information (SQN) transmitted from the gaming device,
The information transmission means receives update information that can specify a sum of change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived. (FIG. 47).

  According to such a configuration, when it is not determined that the update information has arrived, update information capable of specifying the sum of the change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means is transmitted to the gaming device. Therefore, it is possible to reliably and efficiently collect information on the points in the gaming device.

(2-12) The information transmitting means transmits the update information to the gaming device each time it receives information from the gaming device that instructs transmission of update information that can specify the amount of change (see FIG. 4, see Fig. 47 etc.),
Change amount storage means (addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for storing the change amount specified by the update information transmitted by the information transmission means as the update information;
The change amount storage means sets the change amount sequentially specified by the specifying means while the state in which the information for instructing the transmission of the update information cannot be received even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the update information was transmitted. Based on this, the stored change amount is updated (FIG. 46),
When the information transmission unit receives information instructing transmission of the update information in a state where a change amount based on the change amount sequentially specified by the specifying unit is stored in the change amount storage unit, Update information that can identify the change amount stored in the change amount storage means is transmitted (FIG. 46).

  According to such a configuration, even if the state where communication between the gaming device and the slot machine is interrupted continues, it is possible to reliably collect information on the points in between during the state. .

(3-1) Connection unit (connector 220) for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using the gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and one game can be started by setting the number of bets by the number of points and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed and points are added according to the winnings generated by the display result of the variable display device,
A front member (front door 2b) covering the front surface of the slot machine so as to be openable and closable;
Lock means for locking the front member in a closed state (front door opening solenoid 110, engagement protrusions 6a and 6b, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b);
Specific means (game control microcomputer, payout control microcomputer, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change (addition number, subtraction number) according to the setting of the bet number and the occurrence of winnings; ,
Information transmission means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including addition number and subtraction number) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
A game prohibition state in which a new game cannot be started (the number of bets) when receiving the information (FIG. 44; request for opening the front door) for instructing the unlocking by the locking means transmitted from the gaming device. Game prohibition means (FIG. 44; BET prohibition by LSI 117 and main control board 116) for making the operation invalid state),
Release control means (FIG. 44; lock release by LSI 117) for performing control to release the lock by the lock means after the game prohibition means is brought into the game prohibited state,
The release control means performs control for releasing the lock by the lock means until a predetermined condition is satisfied when information for instructing the lock release by the lock means (FIG. 44; request for opening the front door) is received. The delay means for delaying (FIG. 44; the LSI 117 delays the excitation of the front door opening solenoid 110 until the wait time elapses (or until the game ends when the game is in progress)).

  According to such a configuration, the closed state of the front member can be released without affecting the game result by an instruction from the gaming apparatus side.

(3-2) The specifying unit specifies the amount of change even when the holding point changes while the game prohibition unit is in the game prohibition state (FIG. 44; S units are in the game prohibition state). Also, when the score changes during the period, the change amount (addition number = 10 in FIG. 44 is specified).
The information transmitting means provides update information that can specify the amount of change when the amount of change of the holding point is specified by the specifying means while the game prohibiting means is in the game prohibited state. Transmit to the device (operation response of addition number = 10 in FIG. 44).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to cause the gaming device to manage the points including the amount of change in points after the game is prohibited.

  (3-3) The predetermined condition is that a time equal to or longer than a predetermined game restriction time (4.1 seconds) elapses.

  According to such a structure, even if it is in a game when it is set as a game prohibition state, obstruction | occlusion of a front member is not cancelled | released before the completion | finish of the game.

  (3-4) When the information for instructing the lock means to release the lock is received during the game whose symbols are variably displayed on the variable display device, the delay means ends the game. Control for releasing the lock by the lock means is delayed until the game is prohibited (FIG. 44).

  According to such a structure, even if it is in a game when it is set as a game prohibition state, obstruction | occlusion of a front member is not cancelled | released before the completion | finish of the game.

(4-1) Connection unit (connector 220) for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using the gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and one game can be started by setting the number of bets by the number of points and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed and points are added according to the winnings generated by the display result of the variable display device,
Specific means (game control microcomputer, payout control microcomputer, addition number counter, subtraction number counter, etc.) for specifying the amount of change (addition number, subtraction number, external output information) of game data that changes as the game progresses External output information counter),
Information transmitting means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including addition number, subtraction number, and external output information) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
From when a communication incapable state in which no signal is transmitted from the gaming device occurs until recovery processing is executed to recover from the communication incapable state and restore data consistency with the slot machine In the meantime, communication means storage means for storing the change amount of the game data specified by the specifying means (FIG. 58 to FIG. 75; the CU is activated after the transmission of the operation response transmitted immediately before the power supply of the CU is turned off. Including the number of additions, subtractions, points, etc. as the current number until the recovery process is performed, the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, the points count counter, etc., and each data of the previous number)
The information transmission means transmits update information that can specify the amount of change of the game data stored in the storage means when communication is disabled to the gaming device when the restoration process is performed (FIG. 58 to FIG. 58). FIG. 75: Recovery data is transmitted as a recovery response after the operation response transmitted immediately before the power supply of the CU is transmitted until the CU is activated and recovery processing is performed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the gaming device to accurately manage game data that reflects the amount of change in game data on the slot machine side from when the communication is disabled until recovery. It becomes possible.

(4-2) Game prohibition means for setting a game prohibition state in which a new game cannot be started when the communication disable state occurs (FIGS. 58 to 75; stop play upon detection of disconnection (betting number operation disabled state or game) Further prohibition state))
The non-communication storage means is specified by the specifying means during a period from when the communication disabled state occurs until the game data cannot be changed after the game prohibition unit has entered the game prohibition state. The amount of change in game data stored is stored (FIGS. 58 to 75; additions changed since the stop of play (betting number operation invalid state or game prohibited state) since the transmission of an operation response immediately before the power-off of the CU) Number, subtraction number, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, accurate game data management that reflects the amount of change in game data on the slot machine side from when the communication is disabled until the game data cannot be changed. Can be used as a gaming device.

(4-3) The non-communicable storage means stores a backup amount transmitted immediately before, which is a change amount of game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the communication impossible state occurs. (FIGS. 58 to 75; previous number of times),
The information transmitting means includes
The previous transmitted update information that can specify the immediately transmitted change amount is transmitted to the gaming device together with the update information (FIG. 13, FIG. 58 to FIG. 75; the recovery data as the previous number is transmitted as a recovery response),
Incompatibility occurrence time determination information (SQN, figure) for enabling the gaming apparatus to determine whether or not the incommunicable state has occurred before the gaming apparatus receives the immediately transmitted update information. 13 (b)) is transmitted to the gaming device.

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming device, even if the amount of change in the game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the incommunicable state occurs does not reach the gaming device, it is determined to that effect Thus, the game data can be updated including the immediately previous transmitted change amount specified by the immediately previous transmitted update information, and the change amount of the game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the communication disabled state is Even in the case of arrival, it becomes possible to manage game data accurately.

  (4-4) The information transmitting means is a communication number for confirming whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received to / from the gaming device. (SQN) is transmitted to the gaming device as information for determining when communication is impossible.

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming device side, each time data is transmitted / received, the number is updated, and the communication number is used to check whether communication is properly performed. It is possible to determine whether or not the change amount of the game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the disabled state has reached the gaming device.

(5-1) Connection unit (connector 220) for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and one game can be started by setting the number of bets by the number of points and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed and points are added according to the winnings generated by the display result of the variable display device,
A score storage means (score counter) for storing the score;
A remaining score determination means (LSI 117, FIG. 41) for determining the presence or absence of a remaining score necessary for setting the betting number based on the score stored in the score storage means;
Game prohibition means (FIGS. 41 to 44; invalidation of betting number operation by LSI 117) for making a game prohibition state in which a new game cannot be started,
The game prohibition means is:
Predetermined information corresponding game prohibition means (FIGS. 42 and 44) which sets the game prohibited state when predetermined information (FIGS. 42 and 44; operation instruction including prohibition request present) is transmitted from the gaming device; ,
And a point-inhibiting game prohibiting unit (FIG. 41) that puts the game in a prohibited state when it is determined by the remaining point determining unit that there is no remaining point necessary for setting the bet amount.

  According to such a configuration, as a method of making the game prohibited state in the point-type slot machine, when the number of points in the slot machine has decreased, it can be determined on the slot machine side to enter the game prohibited state, Since the game is prohibited because the predetermined information is transmitted from the gaming device, it is possible to respond to a command from the gaming device, and depending on the cause of the necessity to enter the gaming prohibited state. Both the case where the slot machine itself makes the game prohibited state and the case where the slot machine makes the game prohibited state according to the command from the gaming device can be dealt with.

(5-2) A game device for storing and updating the score can be connected to the connection portion separately from the score storage means (see FIGS. 3 and 4).
Specific means (game control microcomputer, payout control microcomputer, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to the setting of bets and the occurrence of winnings,
It further includes information transmission means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including addition number and subtraction number) that can specify the amount of change to the gaming device.

  According to such a configuration, since it becomes possible to perform the point management on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the slot machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the slot machine is suppressed as much as possible. be able to.

  In particular, slot machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the slot machine. is there.

  In addition, because the point management is performed on the gaming device side, when the method of controlling to the gaming prohibited state by waiting for a command from the gaming device side when the number of points is reduced, the points in the slot machine It is possible to know that the number of points has been reduced in the gaming device only after the decrease is transmitted to the gaming device, and there is a possibility that the timing for controlling the gaming prohibited state by the time lag during that time may be delayed. When the number of points in the slot machine decreases, the slot machine side determines that fact and puts the game in a prohibited state, so that the inconvenience due to the time lag described above can be prevented. In addition, since the game is prohibited even when the predetermined information is transmitted from the gaming device, it is possible to respond to a command from the gaming device.

  (5-3) The information transmission means can specify the amount of change specified by the specification means between the time when the update information is transmitted and the time when the game is prohibited by the point-corresponding game prohibition means. The update information is transmitted to the gaming device (FIG. 41; the first action response of “the number of points = 3, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 3” is transmitted, and then the number of bets is given by 3 BET An operation response of “the number of holding points = 0, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 3”, which is the amount of change that has occurred until the operation is disabled, is further transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, the amount of change in holding points from the time when the update information is transmitted until the game prohibition state can be grasped on the gaming device side, and the final amount after the game prohibition state is reached. The points can be managed on the gaming device side.

(5-4) a front member (front door 2b) covering the front surface of the slot machine so as to be opened and closed;
Lock means for locking the front member in a closed state (front door opening solenoid 110, engagement protrusions 6a and 6b, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b),
The predetermined information is information (FIG. 14; game prohibition request with operation request Bit3 = 1, FIG. 44; prohibition request present) transmitted when instructing the lock means to release the lock.

  According to such a configuration, when the front member is unlocked and released, the game can be prohibited in response to a command from the gaming device.

  (5-5) The predetermined information is information transmitted when a game end request is made to the gaming device (FIG. 14; operation request Bit3 = 1 game prohibition request, FIG. 42; operation instruction including prohibition request present) ).

  According to such a configuration, when a signal requesting the end of the game is input, the game can be prohibited in response to a command from the gaming device.

(6-1) The present invention accepts a recording medium (card) and stores a player's valuable value (prepaid balance, number of points, or number of medals) specified by recorded information recorded on the recording medium. A communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming, and a variable display device that can change the display state. When the game can be started by setting, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, one game is completed, and the derived display result becomes a predetermined specific display result. Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) that can generate a prize,
Game history data totaling means for totalizing game history data for each player (FIG. 99; normal mode processing unit of game history data management unit 291 and current player game history data storage unit of display effect control unit 292);
Game history data storage means (FIG. 99; current player game history data storage section and backup data storage section of the game data storage section 392) for storing the game history data aggregated by the game history data aggregation means;
The game history data storage means retains the storage of the game history data even after the recording medium received by the gaming device is ejected (FIG. 99; storage of game history data in the backup data storage unit). Hold),
The game history data totaling means is based on the condition that command information (same command) indicating that it is the same player is received from the gaming device (FIG. 100; Y is determined in S22). Inheritance counting means (FIG. 100; S12) for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to the game history data stored in the history data storage means is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player with respect to the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player When the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, the game history data before leaving the seat is determined to be the same player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player.

  (6-2) In the slot machine of (6-1), when the game is resumed after the recording medium is ejected, the command information is not transmitted from the gaming device (FIG. 100; difference A game history data erasure unit (FIG. 100; FIG. 100) that erases the game history data of the player who has played a game before the recording medium is discharged on the condition that a command is transmitted and N is determined in S22). S15) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the slot machine. The game history data of the current player can be accumulated and totaled with respect to the received game history data, so that the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the game history data by taking over the game history data before leaving after being determined to be the same player, and the game history data before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player. The inconvenience of being interrupted can be prevented.

(6-3) In the slot machine of (6-1) or (6-2), the game history data totaling means includes:
In-game data storage means (FIG. 99; current player game history data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data of the player who is playing the game,
End data storage means for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game (FIG. 99; backup data storage unit of display effect control unit 292);
In response to ejection of the recording medium from the gaming device, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as game history data of the player who has finished the game. (FIG. 99; upon receipt of the card return notification, the stored data of the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and when the command information is received from the gaming device, Data storage switching means (FIG. 99, FIG. 100; S12) for switching to a state in which the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored as game history data of the player who is playing the game by the data storage means during game May be included.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is used as the game history data of the player who is playing the game by the in-game data storage means. Since the game state is switched to the state to be stored, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means can be taken over in subsequent games, and new game history data can be added and updated to be accumulated and stored.

  (6-4) In the slot machine of any one of (6-1) to (6-3), the takeover counting means accepts a member recording medium issued to a member player to the game device. On the condition that the game history data is stored, the game history data of the member stored in the game history data storage means is accumulated and added to the new game history data (FIG. 99; in the case of the C-ID of the member card) Only the current player's game history data is stored and the game history is totaled).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on the condition that the recording medium for the member is received by the recording medium receiving unit. Therefore, the advantage of taking over the game history data can be limited to the member players, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(7-1) In the present invention, a game with a score is possible, and a communication unit (S communication control unit 82) that communicates with a game device that adds a score using a game value owned by the player; A variable display device whose display state can be changed, and a game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and a display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed. This is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which a winning can be generated when the display result derived and displayed is a predetermined display result, and points are added in accordance with the winning. And
Specific means (microcomputer for slot machine control, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means (score counter) for storing the score;
A score update means (payout control unit 117) for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 40; addition number, subtraction) for performing control to transmit the update information that can specify the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device Send an action response containing a number)
Player identification information storage means (FIG. 99; current player game history data storage section of display effect control section 292) for storing player identification information for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus at the start of communication with the gaming apparatus. (FIG. 23, FIG. 33, FIG. 58 to FIG. 75; a recovery response including C-ID is transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming device is connected to the slot machine and communication is started, a player who plays a game after the connection between the slot machine and the gaming device is played before the connection. Since the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means is transmitted from the communication unit to the gaming device as information for determining the identity with the player who has been connected, the game is performed after connection. The identity of the player and the player who played the game before the connection can be determined, and the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players can be prevented.

(7-2) In the slot machine of (7-1), the information transmission control unit sends the update information and the points stored in the point storage unit from the communication unit to the gaming device. Control to send periodically (every 200 ms),
The communication unit determines whether there is a mismatch as a result of determination of consistency between the update result of the score based on the update information by the gaming device and the score stored in the score storage means. Sometimes receiving correction information transmitted from the gaming device (receiving a correction instruction command),
A score correction means for correcting the score stored in the score storage means based on the received correction information (the payout control unit 117 corrects the score according to the correction instruction command); It may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming machine side and the slot machine side are caused by an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to fraud and other causes. Even when the stored score does not match, the score stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(8-1) The present invention relates to a communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device that enables a player's valuable value to be used in a game, and a variable display device that can change a display state. The game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, one game is completed, and the displayed display result is displayed in advance. A slot machine game (slot machine 2S) in which a winning can be generated when a predetermined display result is obtained,
A game history data storage means (FIG. 5; the S game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data generated by the execution of the game on the gaming machine;
Game history data display means (display 51) for displaying the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
Game history data erasure means (RAM clear switch 293) for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
When the game history data is erased by the game history data erasure means, a control is performed to transmit a clear command for clearing a history display to be executed based on the game history data in the gaming device to the gaming device. Clear command transmission control means (FIG. 5; game history data management unit 291 that transmits a clear notification).

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game history data is erased on the slot machine side, a clear command is transmitted to the gaming device, and the history display clear process is performed on the gaming device side according to the clear command. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history display from being flawed on the slot machine side and the gaming apparatus side.

(8-2) In the slot machine of (8-1), the game history data storage means is
Today's history data storage unit for storing today's game history data (today's storage area in the storage area for 10 days);
Including a past history data storage unit that stores game history data before the previous day (a storage area other than today within a storage area for 10 days),
The game history data erasure means shifts and stores the stored data in the today's data storage unit to the past history data storage unit and deletes the stored data in the today's history data storage unit (1 in the storage area for 10 days). The old storage area data is erased and the data in each storage area is shifted one by one to the old storage area, thereby deleting the current storage area data).

  According to such a configuration, on the slot machine side, the game history data of today stored in the history data storage unit of today is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit storing game history data of the previous day. At the same time, since the stored data in the today history data storage unit is erased, on the slot machine side, today's game history data can be stored and held as past game history data before the previous day, and the past game history data can be stored. It can also be used effectively.

  (8-3) In the slot machine of (8-1) or (8-2) above, game data transmission control means (transmission of game data) for controlling the transmission of game data generated during a game to the gaming device The game history data management unit 291) may be further included.

  According to such a configuration, the game history data can be updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the slot machine, and the game displayed on the gaming device The history data can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(9-1) The present invention accepts a recording medium (card) and plays a player-owned valuable value prepaid balance, the number of points, or the number of medals specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium) A communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used, and a variable display device that can change the display state. When the game can be started and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, one game is completed, and the derived display result becomes a predetermined specific display result. A slot machine (slot machine 2S) that can receive a prize,
Normal game data update means for updating game history data generated by a player playing a game during a normal game that has not received a test mode notification for confirming the operation of the slot machine (FIG. 6). ; S display game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292),
Based on the notification of the test mode received from the gaming device, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data updating means (FIGS. 5 and 99; by the operation of the test hit mode processing unit). The game history data is not stored in the P game history data storage unit or the S game history data storage unit, but is stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, normal game data updating means for updating game history data generated by a player playing a game during a normal game that has not received a test mode notification for confirming the operation of the slot machine. Therefore, the game history data during normal games can be tabulated in the slot machine.

  Moreover, since the slot machine receives the notification of the test mode, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data update means, so that the normal game is distinguished from the game history data in the test mode. Only the game history data inside can be tabulated.

  (9-2) In the slot machine according to (9-1), the test mode data transmission control means (FIGS. 5 and 99) performs control to transmit the game history data in the test mode to the gaming device. A game history data management unit 291) for transmitting game data in the trial hit mode may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since game history data in the test mode is displayed by the gaming device, various adjustment operations can be performed while viewing the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming device. Work efficiency is improved.

  (9-3) In the slot machine according to (9-1) or (9-2), the test mode is separate from the game history data generated when a player plays a game during the normal game. Test mode data storage means (FIG. 5, FIG. 99; trial hit game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing the game history data therein may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since the slot machine includes the in-test mode data storage means for storing the game history data in the test mode separately from the game history data in the normal game, the game in the normal game It is possible to store the game history data in the test mode separately from the history data.

  (9-4) In the slot machine according to (9-3) above, the data storage means during the test mode performs a predetermined operation during the test mode (touching the icon of the recount button displayed on the display 312) The stored game history data is once cleared based on the operation being performed, and then the storage of the game history data in the test mode is resumed (test hit mode processing based on reception of the recount notification) May be configured to clear the memory of the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, based on a predetermined operation being performed during the test mode, the game history data stored in the data storage means during the test mode is once cleared and then a new game history during the test mode. In order to resume the data storage, for example, after performing various adjustment operations based on the game history data in the test mode, the game history data in the test mode is again added again in order to add up the adjusted operation data. As described above, it is possible to start counting the game history in the test mode from the beginning.

  (9-5) In the slot machine of the above (9-4), the slot machine is in a test mode for performing control to display game history data in the test mode stored in the data storage means in the test mode It may be configured to include data display control means (a trial hit mode processing unit that performs control to display game history data in the trial hit mode on the display 51).

  According to such a configuration, since the game history data in the test mode is displayed in the slot machine, it is possible to perform various adjustment operations by looking at the game history data in the test mode displayed in the slot machine It becomes.

(9-6) The slot machine of any one of (9-1) to (9-5) above includes a point update means (point number counter) for updating the points used in the game with the game. ,
The score update means may be configured to update so that the score does not become a predetermined value or less during the test mode (adding the score based on reception of the score addition command).

  According to such a configuration, during the test mode, since the score does not become a predetermined value or less, it is possible to continue to collect the game history in the test mode regardless of the score.

  (9-7) In the slot machine of (9-6), the score update means sets a score to the slot machine when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode. Based on having received from the gaming device a command for exceeding the value (score score addition command), the score is updated so that the score does not fall below a predetermined value (based on the reception of the score score addition command) May be added).

  According to such a configuration, based on the fact that a command for setting the score exceeding the predetermined value is received from the gaming device to the slot machine when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode. Because it is updated so that the score does not fall below the predetermined value, the game has a function of outputting a command for counting the game history data even after the score becomes the predetermined value in the test mode. An apparatus can be provided.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2S slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 3 card unit, 2a body frame, 2b front door, 51 indicator, 51a display area, 110 front door opening solenoid, 112 front door closing detector, 116 main control board, 117 LSI, 220 connector, 309 card insertion slot, 312 display, 319 replay button, 321 lending button, 322 return button, 323 main control unit, 324 external communication unit, 325 game machine communication unit, 327 card reader / writer, 330 connector .

Claims (1)

A game that can be played by holding points, includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that adds points using the player's own gaming value, and a variable display device that can change the display state. The game can be started by setting the number of bets, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, so that one game is completed, and the display result derived and displayed is a predetermined display. A slot machine in which a prize can be generated when a result is obtained, and points are added according to the occurrence of the prize,
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means for storing the score;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device;
Player identification information storage means for storing player identification information read by the player identification information reading means of the gaming apparatus when communication is started with the gaming apparatus ;
Player identification information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus at the start of communication with the gaming apparatus. And a slot machine.

Images